Pioneer DVH-P5900MP Operation Manual
Operation Manual D VD RDS RECE IVER D VH-P5900MP English
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model prope rly . After you have finished reading the instructio ns, keep this man- ual in a safe pla ce for futu r e refer ence . Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 4 ! DVD video disc region numbers 5 ! When an operation is prohibited 7 Precautions T o ensure safe driving 3 Before Y ou Start About this unit 4 About this manual 5 Visit our website 5 In case of trouble 5 F eatures 5 What the marks on DVDs indicate 7 P rotecting your unit from theft 7 Use and care of the remote control 8 Operating this unit What âÂÂs What 10 Basic Operations 14 T uner 15 Playing DVD video discs 19 Playing Video CDs 27 Playing DivX files 31 Playing CDs 36 Audio Adjustments 42 Setting up the DVD player 46 Initial Settings 51 Other F unctions 55 Available accessories Playing songs on iP od 57 Playing songs on USB portable audio player/ USB memory 59 Multi-CD Player 61 TV tuner 65 Bluetooth adapter 67 Introduction of DVD operation 67 Digital Signal P rocessor 68 Additional Infor mation T roubleshoo ting 81 Error messages 83 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 84 Understanding messages 85 Handling guideline of discs and player 86 DVD discs 86 DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 86 AVCHD recorded discs 87 CD-R/CD-RW discs 87 Dual Discs 87 Compressed audio files on the disc 87 DivX video files 88 Language code chart for DVD 90 T erms 91 Specifications 94 Contents En 2
T o ensur e safe driving WARNING ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. ! NEVER install the display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or Video CD while driving. When you park your car in a safe place and apply the parking brake, the picture appears on the screen. Precautions En 3 Section 01 Precautions
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a se- parate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that re- quires proper treatment, recover y and recy- cling. P rivate households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Nor way may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retai- ler (if you purchase a similar new one). F or countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessar y treatment, recover y and recycling and thus prevent po - tential negative effects on the environment and human health. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo- cated for use in W estern Europe, Asia, the Middle East, Africa and Oceania. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. The RDS (radio data system) function operates only in areas with FM stations broadcasting RDS sig- nals. CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! â CLASS 1 L ASER PRODUCTâ This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personnel. ! The P ioneer CarStereo-P ass is for use only in Germany . ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Before Y ou Start En 4 Section 02
Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: ! Register your product. We will keep the de- tails of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or thef t. ! W e offer the latest information about P ioneer Corporation on our website. In case of trouble Should this product fail to operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized P ioneer Ser vice Station. Features DVD-R/RW compatibility It is possible to play back DVD -R/RW discs re- corded with the video format and Video Re- cording format. (Refer to DVD-R/DVD-RW discs on page 86.) Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). WMA, MP3 and AAC compatibility Refer to Compressed audio compatibility on page 88. DivX î video compatibility Refer to DivX compatibility on page 89. Before Y ou Start En 5 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a Pioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music sof tware featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories . âÂÂDolby âÂÂ, â P ro Logic âÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories . ! â DTSâ and â DTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. iPod î compatibility When you use this unit with an inter face adap- ter for iP od (CD -IB100 B) (sold separately), you can control an iPod with Dock Connector . ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation . Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Windows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsof t Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. About MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad- casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic con- tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An indepen- dent license for such use is required. For de- tails, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. About AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Before Y ou Start En 6 Section 02
Several applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions dif- fer depending on the application which is used to encode. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes î version 6.0.5 . ! iT unes is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre- ated by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitles âÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD -R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti- cal order . Official DivX î Certified product Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to-height ratio) type. 2 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached to deter theft. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attach- ing. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Before Y ou Start En 7 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Removing the front panel 1 Press DET ACH to release the front panel. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. 3 Put the front panel into provided pro- tective case for safe keeping. Attaching the front panel 1 Slide the front panel to the left until it clicks. F ront panel and the head unit are jointed on the lef t side. Make sure that the front panel has been jointed to the head unit. 2 Press the right side of the front panel until it is firmly seated. # If you can âÂÂt attach the front panel to the head unit successfully , tr y again. F ront panel may be damaged if you attach the front panel forcedly . Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray. WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y. ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Danger of explosion if batter y is incorrectly re- placed. Replace only with the same or equiva- lent type. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions â rules that apply in your countr y/area. ! Always check carefully that you are loading the batter y with its plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles facing in the proper directions. Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
What â s What Head unit 1 AUDIO button P ress to select various sound quality con- trols. 2 BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and MW/L W bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. 3 SOURCE button, VOLUME This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Rotate it to increase or decrease the vo- lume. 4 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play . 5 EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. 6 T A button P ress to turn T A function on or off . P ress and hold to turn AF function on or off . 7 AUX1 input jack (3.5 mm stereo/video jack) Use to connect an auxiliar y equipmen t. 8 DET ACH button P ress to remove the front panel from the head unit. 9 EQ button P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. a SW button P ress to select the subwoofer setting menu. P ress and hold to select the bass boost set- ting menu. b 1 to 6 buttons These buttons can per form the same opera- tion as NUMBER (1 to 6) buttons on the re- mote control. Press for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi- CD/ DVD player . c a /b /c /d buttons P ress to per form manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. d DISPLA Y button P ress to select different displays. e FUNCTION button P ress to select functions. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î Operating this unit En 10 Section 03
Remote control Button names DVH mode DVD and S-DVD mode 1 SOURCE button P ress to cycle through all the available sour ces. P ress and hold to turn the source off . 2A T T button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the ori- ginal volume level. 3 VOLUME but- tons P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 4 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio language during DVD playback. SUBTITLE but- ton P ress to change the subtitle language during DVD playback. ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. 5 AUTO PLA Y button P ress to turn the DVD auto -playback function on or off . 6 RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î Operating this unit En 11 Section 03 Operating this unit
Button names DVH mode DVD and S-DVD mode 7 BOOKMARK button P ress to operate the preprogrammed functions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 56.) P ress to turn the bookmark functio n on or off . For details , refer to Resume play- back (Bookmark) on page 23. 8 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between DVD , S-DVD and DVH modes . Normally , set to DVH . F or details, refer to Using the r emote control operation mode switc h on the next page. 9 CM BACK /CM SKIP P ress to skip progressively backward/for ward through the video playing. 10 DIRECT button P ress to do direct channel select. Not used. 11 A.MENU but- ton F unctions are the same as AUDIO button on the head unit. P ress to select various sound quality controls. 12 FUNCTION but- ton P ress to select functions. 13 NUMBER but- ton, CLEAR but- ton P ress 0 to 9 to input numbers. Buttons 1 to 6 can operate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc changing for multi-DVD player or multi- CD player . P ress CLEAR to clear the input numbers. P ress to select a menu item on the Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). 14 BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. P ress to switch between media file types. (Refer to Switching the media file type on page 15.) 15 DISPLA Y but- ton P ress to turn the information display on or off when the video is displayed. Depending on the selected source, pressing this button can switch the display indication on the head unit. 16 PLA Y/P AUSE ( f ) button P ress to switch sequentially betwee n playback and pause. REVERSE ( m) button P ress to per form fast reverse. FORW ARD ( n ) button P ress to per form fast for ward. PREVIOUS ( o ) button P ress to return to the previous track (chapter). NEXT ( p) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). STEP ( r/ q) buttons P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback . P ress and hold for one second to activate slow playback. If a DVD-VR disc contains a still image, press r while displaying a still image to switch to the next image or video. STOP ( g ) but- ton Not used. P ress to stop playback. Operating this unit En 12 Section 03
Button names DVH mode DVD and S-DVD mode 17 Move the Joy- stick F unctions are the same as a /b /c /d buttons. Move to do fast forward, revers e and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. Move to select a menu on the DVD menu. Click the Joy- stick Click to display the disc title list, track title list, folder list or file list depending on the source. Click to select a menu on the DVD menu. 18 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback . TOP MENU button P ress to return to the top menu during DVD playback . Using the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote contro l operation modes on the remote control. If you want to operate this unit by remote control, turn the mode switch to DVH mode. In this case, both the head unit â s buttons and remote control can control this unit. DVH mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to DVH. ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as a/ b/ c/ d but- tons. ! Numbers ( 1 to 6) can per form the same op- erations as 1 to 6 buttons on the head unit. â If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 to 6 , press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display. DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD , the joystick and 0 to 10 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Basic operation of DVD video on page 19.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 0 to 10 . (Refer to Watching a Video CD on page 27.) ! When specifying title or track by using NUMBER . (Refer to Specifying title on page 20 and Specifying track on page 27.) ! When operating the DVD setup menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Setting up the DVD player on page 46.) S-DVD mode operation Set to S-DVD mode if separately sold DVD player or Multi-DVD player is controlled by this remote control. S-DVD mode operation are basically the same as that of the DVD mode operation. If P ioneer DVD player (SDV -P7) is connected to this unit as a source DVD player , remote control code setting should be A in the initial settings of SDV -P7. Other wise, the supplied remote control cannot control SDV -P7. Operating this unit En 13 Section 03 Operating this unit
Basic Operations Power ON/OFF T ur ning the unit on % Press SOURCE to tur n the unit on. T ur ning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. Selecting a source % Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch be- tween the following sources: TUNER (tuner) âÂÂTELEVISION (television) â DVD (built-in DVD player) âÂÂS-DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) â MUL TI CD (multi- CD player) â IPOD (iPod) â USB (USB) â EXTERNAL (external unit 1) âÂÂEXTERNAL (ex- ternal unit 2) â AUX1 (AUX 1) â AUX2 (AUX 2) â BLUETOOTH (Bluetooth telephone/audio) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: â When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. â When there is no disc or magazine in the player . â When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 52). ! AUX1 is set to AUDIO by default. Set the AUX1 to OFF when not in use (refer to Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 52). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit âÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the car âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control term- inal, the car âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the an- tenna, turn the source off . (When you con- nected a P ioneer multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) to this unit, auto -antenna cannot be controled.) Built-in DVD player basic operations Playing a disc % Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. # If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu may appear . Refer to Basic operation of DVD video on page 19 and Basic operation of Video CD on page 27. # When the automatic playback function is on, this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 23. # Y ou can eject a disc by pressing EJECT. Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 4. ! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 23. ! If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Refer to Switching the media file type on the next page. Operating this unit En 14 Section 03
! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FRMT READ is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR02-XX is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 83. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD -R/RW/ROM discs. â Audio data (CD -DA) â Compressed audio files â DivX video files ! In case of DVD -R/RW/ROM, this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA). % Press BAND to switch between media file types. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T uner Basic Operations When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. This unit âÂÂs AF (alternative frequencies search) function can be turned on and off . AF should be off for normal tuning operation (refer to page 17). RDS RDS (radio data system) contains inaudible in- formations that helps searching of the radio stations. ! RDS ser vice may not be provided by all sta- tions. ! RDS functions such as AF and T A are only active when your radio is tuned to an RDS station. î î î î î î î î î 1 TA indicator Shows when T A (traffic announcement stand- by) function is on. 2 P rogram ser vice name 3 F requency indicator 4 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 5 TP indicator Shows when a TP station is tuned in. 6 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. Operating this unit En 15 Section 03 Operating this unit
Non-RDS or MW/L W î î î î î 1 Band indicator 2 P reset number indicator 3 F requency indicator 4 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner . 2 Press BAND to select a band. P ress BAND until the desired band is dis- played, FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or MW/L W . 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d . 4 T o perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing c or d . # If you press and hold c or d you can skip sta- tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 1 to 6 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six MW/L W stations can be stored in memor y . % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory , press one of pre- set tuning buttons 1 to 6 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you press the same preset tun- ing button the radio station frequency is re- called from memor y . # Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio sta- tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning but- tons 1 to 6 . Introduction of advanced operations î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: BSM (best stations memor y) âÂÂREG (regional) â LOCAL (local seek tuning)â TA (traffic an- nouncement standby) â AF (alternative fre- quencies search) # If MW/L W band is selected, you can only se- lect BSM or LOCAL . # T o return to the frequency display , press BAND . # If you do not operate functions within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Operating this unit En 16 Section 03
Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning buttons 1 to 6. Once stored you can tune in to those frequen- cies with the touch of button. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using buttons 1 to 6. 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSM. 2 Press a to turn BSM on. Six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored in the order of their signal strength. # T o cancel the storage process, press b. T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LOCAL. 2 Press a to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display . # T o turn local seek tuning off , press b. 3 Press c or d to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for MW/L W : FM: LOCAL 1 âÂÂLOCAL 2 âÂÂLOCAL 3 â LOCAL 4 MW/L W : LOCAL 1 âÂÂLOCAL 2 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Selecting alternati ve frequencies When the tuner can âÂÂt get good reception, the unit automatically search for a different sta- tion in a same network. % Press and hold T A repeatedly to tur n AF (alternative frequency search) on or off. Notes ! Y ou can also turn the AF function on or off in the menu that appears with the pressing of FUNCTION . ! Only RDS stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when AF is on. ! When you recall a preset station, the tuner may update the preset station with a new fre- quency from the station âÂÂs AF list. (This is only available when using presets on the FM1 band.) No preset number appears on the dis- play if the RDS data for the station received differs from that for the originally stored sta- tion. ! Sound may be temporarily interrupted by an- other program during an AF frequency search. ! AF can be turned on or off independently for each FM band. Using PI Seek If the tuner can âÂÂt find a suitable station, or re- ception status becomes bad, the unit will auto- matically search for a different station with a same programming. During the search, PI SEEK is displayed and the output is muted. Using Auto PI Seek for preset stations When preset stations cannot be recalled, as when travelling long distances, the unit can be set to per form PI Seek during preset recall. ! The default setting for Auto PI Seek is off . See Switching A uto PI Seek on page 52. Operating this unit En 17 Section 03 Operating this unit
Limiting stations to regional programming When AF is used, the regional function limits the selection of stations broadcasting regional programs. 1 Press FUNCTION to select REG. 2 Press a or b to turn the regional func- tion on or off. Notes ! Regional programming and regional networks are organized differently depending on the countr y (i.e., they may change according to the hour , state or broadcast area). ! The preset number may disappear from the display if the tuner tunes in a regional station which differs from the originally set station. ! The regional function can be turned on or off independently for each FM band. Receiving traffic announc ements T A (traffic announcement standby) lets you re- ceive traffic announcements automatically , no matter what source you are listening to. T A can be activated for both a TP station (a sta- tion that broadcasts traffic information) or an enhanced other network âÂÂs TP station (a station carr ying information which cross-references TP stations). 1 T une in a TP or enhanced other net- work â s TP station. TP indicator will light. 2 Press T A to turn traffic announcement standby on. # T o turn traffic announcements standby off , press TA again. 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the T A volume when a traffic announcement begins. The newly set volume is stored in memor y and recalled for subsequent traffic announce- ments. 4 Press T A while a traffic announcement is being received to cancel the announce- ment. The tuner returns to the original source but re- mains in the standby mode until TA is pressed again. # Y ou can also cancel the announcement by pressing SOURCE, BAND , a, b, c or d while a traffic announcement is being received. Notes ! Y ou can also turn the T A function on or off in the menu that appears with the pressing of FUNCTION . ! The system switches back to the original source following traffic announcement recep- tion. ! Only TP and enhanced other network âÂÂs TP sta- tions are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when T A is on. Switching the RDS display % Press DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: P rogram ser vice name âÂÂPTY information â F requency PTY (program type ID code) information is listed on the next page. # PTY information and the frequency appear on the display for eight seconds. # If a PTY code of zero is received from a station or the signal is too weak for this unit to pick up the PTY code, you cannot switch to PTY informa- tion display. Operating this unit En 18 Section 03
Receiving PTY alarm broadcasts When the emergency PTY code broadcasts, the unit receives it automatically ( ALM ap- pears). When the broadcasting ends, the sys- tem returns to the previous source. ! An emergency announcement can be can- celed by pressing TA . PTY list Specific T ype of program NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information and advice SPORT Sports WEA THER W eather reports/meteorological infor- mation FINANCE Stock market reports, commerce , trading, etc. POP MUS P opular music ROCK MUS Contemporar y modern music EASY MUS Easy listening music OTH MUS Non-categorized music JAZZ Jazz COUNTRY Countr y music NA T MUS National music OLDIES Oldies, golden oldies FOLK MUS F olk music L.CLASS Light classical music CLASSIC Classical music EDUCA TE Educational programs DRAMA Radio plays and serials CUL TURE National or regional culture SCIENCE Nature, science and technology V ARIED Light entertainment CHILDREN Children âÂÂs SOCIAL Soc ial affair s RELIGION Religious affairs or ser vices PHONE IN Phone in TOURING T ravel progra ms; not for traffic an- nouncements LEISURE Hobbies and recreational activities DOCUMENT Documentaries Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video Read the precautions with discs and player on Handling guideline of discs and player on page 86. î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 2 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current chapter . 4 Media indicator 5 DVD-VR indicator 6 Dolby Digital indicator Shows the Dolby Digital is on when the multi- channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. 7 dts indicator Shows the DTS is on when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. Basic operation of DVD video 1 Use the joystick to select the desired menu option. When the DVD offers a menu, a menu is dis- played. # This function is available for DVD video. 2 Click the joystick. Playback starts from the selected menu item. Operating this unit En 19 Section 03 Operating this unit
# Y ou can display the menu by pressing the MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is playing. P ressing either of these buttons again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro - vided with the disc. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward con- tinues even if you release m or n. T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. # There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next chapter . P ressing o once skips to the start of the current chapter . Pressing again will skip to the previous chapter . Chapter numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. 5 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop DVD playback by pressing g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying title T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired title. Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in that order . Selecting a chapter directly When using the remote control, you can select a chapter directly by entering the desired chapter number . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. 1 Press DIRECT. Chapter number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired chapter number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The chapter of entered number will play . Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. Operating this unit En 20 Section 03
% Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! If a DVD- VR disc contains a still image, press r while displaying a still image to switch to the next image or video. ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . 2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. 1 Press AUDIO during playback. The audio selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press AUDIO while the audio selection icon is displayed. The audio changes each time you press AUDIO . Operating this unit En 21 Section 03 Operating this unit
Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs package indicates the number of recorded languages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD setup menu. For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 47. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit âÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Changing the subtitle langu age during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. 1 Press SUBTITLE during playback. The subtitle selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press SUBTITLE while the subtitle selec- tion icon is displayed. The subtitle language changes each time you press SUBTITLE . Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD setup menu. F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 46. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 48. 1 Press ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. The angle icon and angle number are displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press ANGLE while the angle icon and angle number are displayed. The angle changes each time you press ANGLE . Notes ! The 3 mark on a DVD âÂÂs package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! P ressing ANGLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback, but the viewing angle does not change. Operating this unit En 22 Section 03
Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! This function is available for DVD video. % During playback, press BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to five discs. Af ter that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press and hold BOOKMARK during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding EJECT at the point you want to bookmark. Next time you load the disc, playback will resume from the bookmarked point. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method. T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press EJECT. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % Press AUTO PLA Y to turn automatic playback on. A.PLA Y ON is displayed. # T o turn automatic playback off , press AUTO PLA Y again. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on the next page). CM skip/CM back This function skips a reproduced image for a specified time. If the currently playing disc contains commercials, it is possible to skip them. % T o skip progressively backward or for - ward, press CM BACK or CM SKIP. Each time you press CM BACK or CM SKIP it changes steps in the following order: CM back 5 sec. â 15 sec. âÂÂ30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. CM skip 30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ1.5 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. âÂÂ5.0 min. âÂÂ10.0 min. After displaying the selected option for two seconds, reproduced image skips. # If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically re- turned. Return to the specified scene Y ou can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. ! This function is available for DVD video. % Press RETURN to return to the specified scene. # If a specified scene has not been prepro- grammed in DVD disc, this function is not possi- ble. Selecting the title list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Operating this unit En 23 Section 03 Operating this unit
The title list lets you see the list of titles on a playing DVD - VR disc. The title list is displayed when playing DVD - VR disc with both original mode and playlist mode. Y ou can easily select a desired title from the title list. ! This function is available for DVD - VR . ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the title name list. Titles can also be selected by using the a/ b/ c/ d buttons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting the title list on the next page. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of ti- tles. 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the desired title. 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired title. When you select the title, that selection will begin to play . # Y ou can also select the title by clicking the joy- stick. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent chapter (title). % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: For DVD video REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂLR SEL (audio output) â P AUSE (pause) âÂÂCOMP (compression) For DVD - VR discs REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂLR SEL (audio output) â P AUSE (pause) âÂÂitem list âÂÂCOMP (com- pression) â PLA YLIST (playlist) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the DVD playback : DSC (disc repeat), CPT (chapter re- peat), and TTL (title repeat). 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat the current disc ! TTL â Repeat just the current title ! CPT â Repeat just the current chapter # If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/ reverse during CPT, the repeat play range changes to DSC. # Y ou cannot operate repeating play when DVD AUTO PLA Y is on (refer to Automatic play- back of DVDs on the previous page). Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LR SEL. Operating this unit En 24 Section 03
2 Press c or d to select the desired set- ting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R â Left and right ! L â Left ! R â Right ! MIX â mixing left and right Note This function is possible only with Linear PCM sound. Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. # T o turn pause off , press b. Selecting the title list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. The title list lets you see the list of titles on a playing DVD - VR disc. The title list is displayed when playing DVD - VR disc with both original mode and playlist mode. Y ou can easily select a desired title from the title list. ! This function is available for DVD - VR . ! Y ou can also display the title name list by clicking the joystick. Titles can also be se- lected by using the joystick. Refer to Select- ing the title list on page 23. 1 Press FUNCTION to select the title list. P ress FUNCTION until the title list appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to scroll through the list of titles. 3 Press d to select the desired title. When you select the title, that selection will begin to play . 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Selecting the play mode Y ou have two methods for playing DVD - VR disc; ORIGINAL (original) and PLA YLIST (play- list). ! Titles created with DVD recorders are called original. Based on original, rear - ranged titles are called playlist. Playlists are created on DVD -R/RW discs. ! PLA YLIST can only be selected when a disc that has a playlist is played. ! This function is available for DVD - VR . 1 Press FUNCTION to select the play mode. P ress FUNCTION until ORIGINAL or PLA YLIST appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the play mode. ORIGINAL âÂÂPLA YLIST # If the play mode is changed, playback starts from the beginning of the selected play mode. Operating this unit En 25 Section 03 Operating this unit
Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon 2 Media indicator 3 Title number indicator 4 Chapter number indicator 5 Play time indicator 6 V ariable message area DVD video: shows the audio language, subti- tle language, viewing angle, repeat range and speaker output channel. DVD- VR : shows the play mode, audio system, speaker output channel, subtitle setting and repeat range. 7 Title display Shows the name of the currently playing title. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: For DVD video Information display 1 âÂÂInformation dis- play 2 â Normal playback display For DVD - VR discs Information display 1 âÂÂInformation dis- play 2 â Title display âÂÂNormal playback display # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Operating this unit En 26 Section 03
Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD Read the precautions with discs and player on Handling guideline of discs and player on page 86. î î î î 1 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 3 Media indicator Basic operation of Video CD 1 Press NUMBER to select the desired menu option. When a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function starts playing, a menu is dis- played. ! Playback starts from the selected menu item. ! When the menu is two or more pages long, press o or p to switch between dis- plays. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # PBC playback of Video CD cannot be can- celled. # Operation with the joystick is not possible. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward con- tinues even if you release m or n. T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. P ressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Using NUMBER also per forms the same op- eration. For more details, refer to Specifying track on this page. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop Video CD playback by pressing g , that location on the disc is memorized en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying track T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired track. T rack number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected track. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in that order . Operating this unit En 27 Section 03 Operating this unit
Notes ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played and operation may not be possible. ! With Video CD, direct search is not possible during PBC playback. Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press 0 to 9 buttons to enter the desired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play . Notes ! After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be op- erated. Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Operating this unit En 28 Section 03
2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂLR SEL (audio output) â P AUSE (pause) âÂÂCOMP (compression) ! During PBC (Playback Control) playback, you cannot select REPEA T . ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you play the same track over again. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat the current disc ! TRK â Repeat just the current track # If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LR SEL. 2 Press c or d to select the desired set- ting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R â Left and right ! L â Left ! R â Right ! MIX â mixing left and right Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current track pauses. Operating this unit En 29 Section 03 Operating this unit
# T o turn pause off , press b. Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Switching the information display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon 2 Media indicator 3 T rack number indicator 4 Play time indicator 5 Repeat indicator 6 Speaker output channel indicator % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂNormal playback display # When a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function starts playing, PLA YBACK CON- TROL ON will be displayed instead of track num- ber indicator and play time indicator . Operating this unit En 30 Section 03
Playing DivX files W atching a DivX These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DivX with your DVD player . More advanced DivX operation is explained starting on page 34. î î î î 1 F older number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 2 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. 4 Media indicator Basic Operations 1 Press a or b to select a folder . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release m or n .T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. # This is fast for ward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is can- celed when the previous or next file is reached. 3 T o skip back or forward to another file, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next file. P ressing o once skips to the start of the cur- rent file. Pressing again will skip to the pre- vious file. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re- corded on CD- R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ ROM. (Refer to page 88 for files that can be played back.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. Selecting a file directly When using the remote control, you can select a file directly by entering the desired file num- ber . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. 1 Press DIRECT. File number input display appears. 2 Press 0 to 9 buttons to enter the desired file number . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The file of entered number will play . Operating this unit En 31 Section 03 Operating this unit
# After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD conte nt, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), EXPIRED is displayed. ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim- ited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the con- tent as of ten as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . About your regis- tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code on page 50. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. % If the message is displayed after load- ing a disc containing DivX VOD content, press f. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, press p. # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, press g. Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during DivX playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Slow motion playback When playing DivX video file, this lets you slow down playback speed. Operating this unit En 32 Section 03
% Press r and hold during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) When playing a DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. 1 Press AUDIO during playback. The audio selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press AUDIO while the audio selection icon is displayed. The audio changes each time you press AUDIO . Note P ressing AUDIO during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Selecting files from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the list of files (or folders). File can also be selected by using the a/ b/ c/ d but- tons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting files fro m the file name list on the next page. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of files (or folders). 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the list of file names (or folder names). 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play. When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . # Y ou can also select a file name (or folder name) by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), move the joystick lef t. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Operating this unit En 33 Section 03 Operating this unit
Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or FLD . % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂP AUSE (pause) âÂÂitem list â COMP (comp) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or DivX video file playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FLD (folder repeat), TRK (file repeat) and DSC (repeat all files). 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat all files ! TRK â Repeat just the current file ! FLD â Repeat the current folder # If you per form file search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK , the repeat play range changes to FLD . # If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. # When FLD (folder repeat) is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current file pauses. # T o turn pause off , press b. Selecting files from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! Y ou can also display the list of files (or folders) by clicking the joystick. File can also be selected by using the joystick. Refer to Selecting files fr om the file name list on the previous page. 1 Press FUNCTION to select a file name list. P ress FUNCTION until the names of files or folders appears in the display . 2 Press a or b to scroll through the list of file names (or folder names). 3 Press d to select the desired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play. When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . Operating this unit En 34 Section 03
# T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), press c. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon When playing a disc containing various data format, MIXED appear on it. 2 Media indicator 3 F older number indicator 4 File number indicator 5 Play time indicator 6 Audio system indecator 7 Subtitle number indicator 8 Repeat indicator 9 Title display Shows the name of the currently playing file. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂTitle display âÂÂNor- mal playback display # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Operating this unit En 35 Section 03 Operating this unit
Playing CDs Listening to a CD Read the precautions with discs and player on Handling guideline of discs and player on page 86. î î î î î î 1 F older number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing when the compressed audio is playing. 2 T rack (file) number indicator 3 Play time indicator 4 Media indicator 5 MP3/WMA/AAC indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing when the compressed audio is playing. Basic Operations 1 Press a or b to select a folder when playing a compressed audio. # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. # Y ou can also per form fast for ward or reverse by pressing and holding m or n on the re- mote control. # If you select ROUGH , pressing and holding c or d enables you to search ever y 10 tracks in the current folder . (Refer to Searching ever y 10 tracks in the current disc or folder on page 40.) 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another track by pressing o or p on the remote con- trol. Notes ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FRMT READ is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR02-XX is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 83. ! When playing CD-EXTRA or MIXED-MODE CDs, compressed audio and CD- DA can be switched by pressing BAND. ! If you have switched between compressed audio and CD-DA, playback starts at the first track on the disc. ! When playing back VBR (variable bit rate) re- corded files, elapsed play time may not be dis- played correctly . ! When playing compressed audio, there is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. ! When audio files are being played back, you can select track in the current folder . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. Operating this unit En 36 Section 03
2 Press 0 to 9 buttons to enter the desired track number . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play . # After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically canceled. Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 48 CD titles in the unit. Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 Play the CD that you want to enter a title for . 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . # When playing a CD TEXT disc, you cannot switch to disc title input display . The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. # When playing compressed audio disc, you cannot switch to disc title input display . 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each press of a will display alphabet, num- bers or symbols in ascending order ( A B C ...). Each press of b will display a letter in des- cending order . 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memor y . 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! Titles remain in memor y , even after the disc has been removed from the unit, and are re- called when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. ! If you connect a multi-CD player , you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. ! When a multi-CD player that does not support disc title functions is connected, you cannot enter disc titles in this unit. Displaying text information on disc % Press DISPLA Y to select the desired text information. For title entered CD T rack number â DISC TITLE (disc title) For CD TEXT discs T rack number â DISC TITLE (disc title) â DSC ARTIST (disc artist name) âÂÂTRK TITLE (track title) â TRK ARTIST (track artist name) Operating this unit En 37 Section 03 Operating this unit
For WMA/MP3/AAC discs F older number and file number â ALBM TITLE (album title) â TRK TITLE (track title) â FLDR NAME (folder name) âÂÂFILE NAME (file name) â ART NAME (artist name) # When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the information of currently playing disc will appear on it. # Elapsed play time is always shown on the dis- play . Notes ! Y ou can scroll to the left of the title by pressing and holding DISPLA Y . ! Audio CD that contains certain information such as text and/or number is CD TEXT . ! If specific information has not been recorded on a disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME ). ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! When Ever Scroll is set to ON at the initial set- ting, text information scrolls continuously in the display . Refer to Switching the Ever Scroll on page 53. Selecting tracks from the track title list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to play back. ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the track name list. T racks can also be selected by using a/ b/ c/ d buttons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting tracks from the list on page 40. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of track titles. 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the desired track title. 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired track title. When you select a track, the selection will begin to play . # Y ou can also select the track by clicking the joystick. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . Selecting tracks from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the list of files (or folders). File can also be selected by using the a/ b/ c/ d but- tons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting tracks fr om the list on page 40. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of files (or folders). 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the list of file names (or folder names). 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play. Operating this unit En 38 Section 03
When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . # Y ou can also select a file name (or folder name) by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), move the joystick lef t. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or FLD . 3 RDM indicator Shows when random play is on. % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â P AUSE (pause) â item list â SCH (search method) â COMP (compression) # T o return to the ordinar y display , press BAND . Selecting a r epeat play range Repeat play plays the same track/folder within the selected repeat play range. Also, the repeat range determines the range of random play and scan play . 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat all tracks ! TRK â Repeat just the current track ! FLD â Repeat the current folder # If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. # When playing CD, per forming track search or fast for ward/reverse cancels the repeat play auto- matically . # When playing compressed audio, per forming track search or fast for ward/reverse during TRK (track repeat) changes the repeat play range to folder repeat. # When FLD (folder repeat) is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing tracks in random order Random play plays tracks in a random order within the selected repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 24. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RANDOM. 2 Press a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , press b. Scanning folders and tracks Scan play searches the song within the se- lected repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 24. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. 2 Press a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. Operating this unit En 39 Section 03 Operating this unit
3 When you find the desired track (or folder) press b to turn scan play off. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing FUNCTION . # After scanning of a disc (folder) is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing disc playback 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current track pauses. # T o turn pause off , press b. Selecting tracks fr om the list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. For CD TEXT discs ! Y ou can also display the track name list by clicking the joystick. T racks can also be se- lected by using the joystick. Refer to Select- ing tracks fr om the track title list on page 38. 1 P ress FUNCTION to select the track title list. P ress FUNCTION until the track title list ap- pears in the display . 2 P ress a or b to scroll through the list of track titles. 3 P ress d to select the desired track title. When you select a track, the selection will begin to play. 4 P ress DISPLA Y to return to the ordinar y dis- play . For WMA/MP3/AAC discs ! Y ou can also display the list of files (or folders) by clicking the joystick. File can also be selected by using the joystick. Refer to Selecting tracks from the file name list on page 38. 1 P ress FUNCTION to select a file name list. P ress FUNCTION until the names of files or folders appears in the display . 2 P ress a or b to scroll through the list of file names (or folder names). 3 P ress d to select the desired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play . When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . ! T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), press c. 4 P ress DISPLA Y to return to the ordinar y dis- play . Searching every 10 tracks in the current disc or folder Y ou can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching ever y 10 tracks. Selecting ROUGH enables you to search ever y 10 tracks. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCH. 2 Press d to select ROUGH. ! FF/REV â F ast for ward and reverse ! ROUGH â Searching every 10 tracks # T o select FF/REV , press c. 3 Press BAND to return to the playback display . 4 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks on a disc (folder). # If the rest of track number is less than 10, press and hold c or d recalls the first (last) one. Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. Operating this unit En 40 Section 03
1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon When playing a disc containing various data format, MIXED appear on it. 2 Media indicator 3 F older number indicator 4 T rack (file) number indicator 5 Play time indicator 6 Repeat indicator 7 Random indicator 8 Scan indicator 9 Title display Shows the text information of currently play- ing disc. â For CD TEXT discs D.TITLE (disc title), D.ARTIST (disc artist name), T .TITLE (track title), T .ARTIST (track artist name) â For WMA/MP3/AAC discs ALBUM (album title), TRACK (track title), FOLDER (folder name), FILE (file name), ARTIST (artist name) % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂTitle display # P ressing DISPLA Y button on the Title display switches text information on the head unit. In this case, text information on the Title display remains unchanged. # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Operating this unit En 41 Section 03 Operating this unit
Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments î î î î î î î 1 Audio display Shows the audio adjustment status. 2 BASS indicator Shows when the bass boost is in effect. 3 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. 4 SW indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio func- tion names. P ress AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following audio functions: FADER (balance adjustment) âÂÂPWRFL (gra- phic equalizer adjustment) â 50HZ 0 (7-band graphic equalizer adjustment) â LOUD (loud- ness) â SUB.W (subwoofer on/off setting) â 80HZ 0 (subwoofer setting) â BASS (bass boost) â HPF (high pass filter) â SLA (source level adjustment) # Y ou can also use A.MENU button on the re- mote control to select an audio menu. # When the rear output setting is R-SP S/W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 53. # Y ou can select the 80HZ 0 only when subwoo- fer output is turned on in SUB.W . # When selecting the FM as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . # If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FADER. # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speak- er balance. FADER F15 to FADER R15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FADER 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. BAL L15 to BAL R15 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL (PWRFL) P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal Operating this unit En 42 Section 03
Display Equalizer curve CUSTOM 1 Custom 1 CUSTOM 2 Custom 2 EQ FLA T Flat SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Super bass ! CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves that you create. Adjust- ments can be made with a 7-band graphic equalizer . ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL (PWRFL) âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL â CUSTOM 1 âÂÂCUSTOM 2 âÂÂEQ FLA T â SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Adjusting equalizer curves The factor y supplied equalizer cur ves, with the exception of EQ FLA T , can be adjusted to a fine degree (nuance control). 1 Press AUDIO to select PWRFL. PWRFL appears in the display . If the equalizer cur ve has been previously se- lected, the cur ve of that previously selected will be displayed instead of PWRFL. 2 Press c or d to select an equalizer curve. 3 Press a or b to adjust the equalizer curve. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the equalizer curve respectively . 6 to âÂÂ4 (or âÂÂ6 ) is displayed as the equalizer cur ve is increased or decreased. # The actual range of the adjustments are differ- ent depending on which equalizer cur ve is se- lected. # The equalizer cur ve with all frequencies set to 0 cannot be adjusted. Adjusting 7-band graphic equalizer Fo r CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the level of each band. ! A separate CUSTOM 1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. If you make adjust- ments when a cur ve other than CUSTOM 2 is selected, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memorized in CUSTOM 1. ! A CUSTOM 2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. If you make adjust- ments when the CUSTOM 2 cur ve is selected, the CUSTOM 2 cur ve will be up- dated. 1 Recall the equalizer curve you want to adjust. See Recalling equalizer cur ves on the previous page. 2 Press AUDIO to select 7-band graphic equalizer adjustment. F requency and the level (e.g., 50HZ 0) appears in the display . 3 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ125Hz âÂÂ315Hz âÂÂ800Hz âÂÂ2kHz â 5kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 4 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the equalization band. Operating this unit En 43 Section 03 Operating this unit
6 to âÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. 5 Press BAND to cancel the 7-band gra- phic equalizer adjustment. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. 2 Press a to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD MID ) appears in the display. # T o turn loudness off , press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) â HIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . 1 Press AUDIO to select SUB.W. # Y ou can also select the subwoofer setting menu by pressing SW on the unit. 2 Press a to turn subwoofer output on. SUB.W NOR appears in the display. Subwoo - fer output is now on. # If the subwoofer output phase has been set to the reverse, SUB.W REV will be displayed. # T o turn subwoofer output off , press b. 3 Press c or d to select the phase of sub- woofer output. P ress c to select reverse phase and REV ap- pears in the display. P ress d to select normal phase and NOR appears in the display . Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can ad- just the cut- off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 Press SW to select 80HZ 0. # Y ou can also select the subwoofer setting menu by pressing AUDIO on the unit. # When the subwoofer output is on, you can se- lect 80HZ 0 (subwoofer setting). 2 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency . 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo - fer . 3 Press a or b to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . 6 to âÂÂ24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Boosting the bass Bass boost function boosts the bass level of sound lower than 100 Hz. The more the bass level is increased, the more the bass sound is emphasized and the entire sound becomes power ful. When using this function with the subwoofer , the sound under the cut- off fre- quency is booste d. 1 Press AUDIO to select BASS. # Y ou can also select the bass boost setting by pressing and holding SW. 2 Press a or b to select a desired level. 0 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Operating this unit En 44 Section 03
Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. 1 Press AUDIO to select HPF. 2 Press a to turn high pass filter on. HPF 80HZ appears in the display . High pass filter is now on. # If the high pass filter has been previously ad- justed, the frequency of that previously selected will be displayed instead of HPF 80HZ. # T o turn high pass filter off , press b. 3 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency . 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. SLA 4 to SLA âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The MW/L W volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Operating this unit En 45 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. This menu can be operated only by using the re- mote control. ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVD mode. î 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 Press g. 2 Press MENU when the disc is stopped. The DVD setup menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to dis- play the DVD setup function names. Move the joystick up or down to switch the fol- lowing DVD setup functions: S.TTL LANG (subtitle language settings) â AUDIO LANG (audio language settings) â MENU LANG (menu language settings) â ASSIST (assist subtitle) âÂÂANGLE (angle icon) â TV ASPECT (TV aspect)â P ARENT AL (paren- tal lock) â DIVX VOD (DivX VOD) â DIVX S.TTL (DivX subtitle) â DIGI OUT (digital output setting) Note If you press MENU during display of a DVD setup menu, the DVD setup menu is canceled and the unit returns to the previous display . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select S.TTL LANG. 2 Click the joystick. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired language. 4 Click the joystick. A subtitle language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language dur- ing playback with SUBTITLE . (Refer to Chan- ging the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) on page 22.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE to switch the subti- tle language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 90, use the number but- tons to input the four digit code of the desired language, and then move the joystick right. Note P ressing CLEAR cancels the input numbers. Operating this unit En 46 Section 03
Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select AUDIO LANG. 2 Click the joystick. An audio language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired audio language. 4 Click the joystick. The audio language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language dur- ing playback with AUDIO . (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 21.) ! Even if you use AUDIO to switch the audio language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select MENU LANG. 2 Click the joystick. A menu language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired menu language. 4 Click the joystick. The menu language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ASSIST. 2 Click the joystick. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select on or off. Each time you move the joystick lef t or right the selected setting switches on or off . 4 Click the joystick. The assist subtitle is set on or off . Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . Operating this unit En 47 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting the angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ANGLE. 2 Click the joystick. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select on or off. Each time you move the joystick lef t or right the selected setting switches on or off . 4 Click the joystick. Angle icon display is set on or off . Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display you use. ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select TV ASPECT. 2 Click the joystick. TV aspect menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired TV aspect. ! 16:9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen 4 Click the joystick. The selected TV aspect is set. Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P ANSCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 7.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs instruc- tions. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVD mode. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parantal lock. ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL. Operating this unit En 48 Section 03
2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input a four digit code number . 4 Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor to the previous or next position. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by moving the joystick right after entering the four digit code number . The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 6 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. ! LEVEL 8 â Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 to LEVEL 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible 7 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Notes ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL. 2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input the re- gistered code number . 4 Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor to the previous or next position. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by moving the joystick right after entering the four digit code number . This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. Press CLEAR and input the correct code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 6 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. 7 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on this page, and press CLEAR 10 times. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Operating this unit En 49 Section 03 Operating this unit
Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX VOD registra- tion code, which you submit to your provider . 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DIVX VOD. 2 Click the joystick. Y our 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider . Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . Setting the DivX subtitle file Y ou can select whether to display DivX exter- nal subtitles or not. ! DivX subtitles will be displayed even when this setting is on if no DivX external subtitle files exist. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DIVX S.TTL. 2 Click the joystick. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select on or off. ! ON â Display the DivX external subtitles ! OFF â Display the DivX subtitles 4 Click the joystick. DivX subtitle is set on or off . Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more then 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be displayed. Setting for digital output Audio which is outputted from digital output of this unit can be selected. Normally , set to STREAM . If this unit âÂÂs digital output is not used, there is no need to change settings. ! Selecting LPCM enables you to switch the output channel if playing the following type of discs. (Refer to Selecting audio output on page 24.) â Dual mono mode DVD video discs â Bilingual DVD - VR discs 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DIGI OUT. 2 Click the joystick. The digital output setting is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired digital output setting. ! STREAM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is output as it is (initial setting) ! LPCM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is con- verted to and output as a linear PCM signal 4 Click the joystick. The selected digital output setting is determined. Operating this unit En 50 Section 03
Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until function name appears in the display . 3 Press FUNCTION to select one of the in- itial settings. P ress FUNCTION to select one of the initial settings. CLOCK AJST (clock) âÂÂOFFCLK (off clock) â FM STP (FM tuning step) âÂÂAUTOPI (auto PI seek) â W ARN (warning tone) âÂÂAUX1 (auxili- ar y input1) â AUX2 (auxiliar y input2) â V .IN (AV input setting) â CAMRA (rear view camera setting) â R-SP (rear output and subwoofer controller) â E-SCRL (ever scroll) â TV (TV sig- nal setting) â D.A TT (digital attenuation) â A.RESET (audio reset) # T o cancel initial settings, press BAND . # Y ou can also cancel initial settings by holding down FUNCTION until the unit turns off . # When you select CAMRA in V .IN , you can se- lect CAMRA . # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate D.A TT and A.RESET instead of R-SP . Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press FUNCTION to select CLOCK AJST. 2 Press c or d to select the segment you wish to set. Hour âÂÂMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. 3 Press a or b to set the clock. P ressing a will increase the value of the se- lected segment. Pressing b will decrease the value of the selected segment. T urning the off clock display on or off If the off clock display is turned on, when the sources are off , the clock appears on the dis- play . 1 Press FUNCTION to select OFFCLK. 2 Press a or b to turn OFFCLK on or off. Setting the FM tuning step Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or T A is on, the tuning step automatically changes to 100 kHz. It may be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz when AF is on. 1 Press FUNCTION to select FM STP. 2 Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. P ressing c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz while AF or T A is on. The selected FM tuning step will ap- pear in the display. Note The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during manual tuning. Operating this unit En 51 Section 03 Operating this unit
Switching Auto PI Seek The unit can automatically search for a differ- ent station with the sam e programming, even during preset recall. 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUTOPI. 2 Press a or b to turn AUTOPI on or off. Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press FUNCTION to select WARN. 2 Press a or b to turn W ARN on or off. Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y equipments connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. About connecting or using auxiliar y equipments, refer to Using the AUX sour ce on page 55. Switching the auxiliary 1 setting 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX1. 2 Press c or d to select desired setting. ! VIDEO â an iP od with video capabilities connected with 4-pole mini plug cable (e.g., CD- V150M) ! AUDIO â auxiliar y equipment connected with stereo mini plug cable ! OFF â No auxiliar y equipment is connected Switching the auxiliary 2 setting 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX2. 2 Press a or b to turn AUX2 on or off. Setting the A V input Y ou can connect AV components to the AV input with an RCA cable. Switch the AV input setting according to the connected AV component. F or more details, refer to the installation man- ual. ! Select TV to watch video of a TV tuner as TELEVISION source. ! Select DVD to watch video of a connected DVD player as S-DVD source. ! Select EXT .V to watch video of a connected video unit as EXT source. ! Select AUX to watch video of an auxiliar y equipment as AUX2 source. ! Select CAMRA to watch a rear view cam- era video while you are backing your vehi- cle. 1 Press FUNCTION to select V .IN. 2 Press c or d to select your desired set- ting. ! OFF â No video component connected ! TV â TV tuner ! EXT .V â External video unit (such as P ioneer products available in the future) ! DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! AUX â Auxiliar y equipment ! CAMRA â Rear view camera # T o watch video of AUX source, set auxiliar y 2 setting on. For details, refer to Switching the aux- iliar y setting on this page. # If AV system display (e.g., AVX-7600) is com- bined with this unit, connect the rear view cam- era to the AV system display . For details concerning connection methods, refer to AV sys- tem display âÂÂs instruction manual. Also, V .IN set- ting of this unit need not be CAMRA. Operating this unit En 52 Section 03
Setting for r ear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. Y ou can install a rear view camera onto the AV input and display a rear view camera video. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) posi- tion, the video automatically switches to a rear view camera video. (F or more details, consult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shif t in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! When you select CAMRA in V .IN , you can select CAMRA . 1 Press FUNCTION to select CAMRA. 2 Press c or d to select an appropriate setting. ! BA T â When the polarity of the connected lead is positive while the gear shif t is in RE- VERSE (R) position ! GND â When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( R-SP FULL ) or subwoofer ( R-SP S/W) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to R-SP S/W, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer with- out using an auxiliar y amp. 1 Press FUNCTION to select R-SP. 2 Press a or b to switch the rear output setting. P ressing a or b will switch between R-SP FULL (full-range speaker) and R-SP S/W (subwoofer) and that status will be displayed. # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select R-SP FULL. # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer R-SP S/W. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the subwoofer output on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 44). ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in the audio menu return to the factor y set- tings. ! Both rear speaker leads outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Switching the Ever Scroll When Ever Scroll is set to ON, recorded text in- formation scrolls continuously in the display . Set to OFF if you prefer the information to scroll just once. 1 Press FUNCTION to select E-SCRL. 2 Press a or b to turn E-SCRL on or off. Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner , you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your countr y TV signal setting. Operating this unit En 53 Section 03 Operating this unit
1 Press FUNCTION to select TV. 2 Press c or d to select an appropriate TV signal. PA L â SECAM Note About your countr y TV signal, consult with your nearest P ioneer dealer . Correcting distorted sound Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW . Normally, leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. 1 Press FUNCTION to select D.A TT. 2 Press c or d to select LOW or HIGH. Resetting the audio functions Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can reset audio functions other than the following settings. ! V olume setting (refer to Adjusting the vo- lume on page 15) ! Listening position setting (refer to Using the position selector on page 70) ! F ader/balance setting (refer to Using bal- ance adjustment on page 69) ! SLA (source level adjustment) setting (refer to Adjusting sour ce levels on page 72) ! Dynamic range control (refer to Using the dynamic range control on page 71) ! Direct control setting (refer to Using the di- rect contr ol on page 72) ! Down-mix setting (refer to Using the down- mix function on page 71) 1 Press FUNCTION to select A.RESET. 2 Press a to display RESETOK?. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 3 Press d to display REALL Y?. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 4 Press a to reset audio functions. COMPLETE appears in the display. Operating this unit En 54 Section 03
Other Functions Setting the level indicator Level indicators can be changed. Style of the level indicator differs depending on the source. % Press EQ and hold to select the level in- dicator . P ress EQ and hold repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: iPod P rogress bar âÂÂoff âÂÂLevel indicator 1 âÂÂLevel in- dicator 2 âÂÂEntertainment Sources other than iPod Level indicator 1 âÂÂLevel indicator 2 âÂÂEnter- tainment âÂÂoff Notes ! When selecting iP od as a source, the progress bar is displayed as a default setting. When sources other than iP od is selected, the level indicator is displayed as a default setting. ! When the source is changed from iP od, the â progress bar â will be changed to the â level in- dicator 1 âÂÂ. And then, if the source is changed to iP od again, the progress bar is displayed. However , if the level indicator has been chan- ged, the selected level indicator will be dis- played even if the source is changed to iP od again. ! When Entertainment, Level indicator 1 or Level indicator 2 is selected on the iP od source, the selected level indicator will be dis- played even if the source is changed. ! When the optical inputs 1 and 2 on DEQ- P6600 are occupied and AUX is connected to this unit, the level indicators may be incor- rectly displayed. Using the AUX source This unit can control an auxiliar y equipment such as VCR or portable device (sold sepa- rately). When connected, auxiliar y equipment is automatically recognized as AUX source and assigned to AUX. About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y equipments to this unit. Mini pin plug cable ( AUX1) When connecting auxiliar y equipment using a mini plug cable iP od and portable audio/video player can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iP od with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od. ! It is possible to connect a portable audio/ video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) to RCA cable, which is sold sepa- rately . However , depending on the cable, re- verse connection between Red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is re- quired. Other wise, audio and video may not be correctly reproduced. % Insert the mini plug into the micro- phone/auxiliary input jack on this unit. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector ( AUX2) When connecting auxiliar y equipment using an IP -BUS-RCA Inter connector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separetely) to connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliar y equipment has RCA outputs. Operating this unit En 55 Section 03 Operating this unit
Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX (AUX1 or AUX2) as the source. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 52. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for each AUX1 or AUX2 source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . 2 Enter a title in the same way as the built-in DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to En- tering disc titles on page 37. Switching between digital and analog When this unit is connected to the DEQ- P6600, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or digital. 1 Press SOURCE to select AUX2 as the source. P ress SOURCE until AUX2 appears in the dis- play . # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX2 cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 52. 2 Press BAND to switch the modes. P ress BAND repeatedly to switch between the following modes: ANALOG (analog) â DIGIT AL (digital) Note When this unit is connected to the DEQ-P6600, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or di- gital. However , when you use AUX2 as the source, make sure the AUX mode is set to analog. AUX digital should not be used with this unit. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using BOOKMARK. % Press BOOKMARK to tur n pause on when selecting the following sources: ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! IPOD â iP od ! USB â USB portable audio player/USB memor y ! MUL TI CD â Multi-CD player # T o turn pause off , press BOOKMARK again. % Press BOOKMARK and hold to turn BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress BOOKMARK and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOKMARK again. % Press BOOKMARK and hold to turn BSSM on when selecting TELEVISION as the source. P ress BOOKMARK and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOKMARK again. Sound muting Sound from this unit is muted automaticall y in the following cases: ! When a call is made or received using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. ! When the voice guidance is output from a P ioneer navigation unit connected to this unit. The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume con- trol, are possible. Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice gui- dance is ended. Operating this unit En 56 Section 03
Playing songs on iPod Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control an inter face adapter for iP od, which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the operation manual of the inter face adapter for iP od. This section provides information on iP od operations with this unit which differs from that described in the operation manual. ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. î î 1 Song number indicator 2 Play time indicator 1 Press SOURCE to select the iPod. P ress SOURCE until you see IPOD displayed. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 3 T o skip back or forward to another song, press c or d. Browsing for a song When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. The operation of this unit to control an iP od is designed to be as close to the operation of the iP od as possible for easy operation and song search. ! If playlist has been selected, first, this unit shows playlist of your iP od âÂÂs name. This playlist plays all songs in your iP od. ! If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compa tible with this unit, those charac- ters will not be displayed. ! If all characters recorded on the iP od are not compa tible with this unit, NO INFO will be displayed. ! Y ou can also per form the following opera- tions by using the joystick. 1 Press a or b repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: PLA YLISTS (playlists) âÂÂARTISTS (artists) â ALBUMS (albums) âÂÂSONGS (songs) â GENRES (genres) # Y ou can also switch to the browsing display by clicking the joystick. 2 Press d to determine the category . List from the selected categor y is displayed. 3 Press a or b to select a song list, album list, artist list or genre list from among the lists. P ress a or b repeatedly to switch the lists. 4 Press d to determine the list. Lists from the selected list are displayed. 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 to find a song you want to listen to. # Y ou can start playback throughout the se- lected list by pressing and holding d. # T o return to the previous list, press c. # F unctions are the same as a/ b/ c/ d buttons. # T o go to the top menu of the list search, press and hold c. # P ress BAND to return to the normal display . A vailable accessori es En 57 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Displaying text information on iPod % Press DISPLA Y to select the desired text information. Song number â SONG TITLE (song title) â ART NAME (artist name) âÂÂALB TITLE (album title) # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. # If all characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, NO INFO will be dis- played. # If specific information has not been recorded on the iP od, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME ). Notes ! Y ou can scroll to the left the text information by pressing and holding DISPLA Y . ! When Ever Scroll is set to ON at the initial set- ting, text information scrolls continuously in the display . Refer to Switching the Ever Scroll on page 53. Introduction of advanced operations î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RDM indicator Shows when random play is selected to SHFL SONG or SHFL ALBUM . 3 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to ONE . % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂSHFL (random play) â P AUSE (pause) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two repeat play ranges: ONE (repeat one song) and ALL (repeat all songs in the list). ! While REPEA T is set to ONE , you cannot se- lect the other songs. 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! ONE â Repeat just the current song ! ALL â Repeat all songs in the selected list Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: SHFL SONG (play back songs in a random order) and SHFL ALBUM (play back albums in a random order). 1 Press FUNCTION to select SHFL. 2 Press c or d repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: ! SHFL SONG â Play back songs in a random order within the selected list ! SHFL ALBUM â Select an album randomly , and then play back all the songs in it in order ! SHFL OFF â Cancel the random play A vailable accessori es En 58 Section 04
Pausing a song 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current song pauses. # T o turn pause off , press b. Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î 1 Source icon 2 Song number indicator 3 Play time indicator 4 Title display SONG (song title), ARTIST (artist name), ALBUM (album title) % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂTitle display # P ressing DISPLA Y button on the Title display switches text information on the head unit. In this case, text information on the Title display remains unchanged. # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Playing songs on USB portable audio player/USB memory Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a USB adapter (e.g., CD -UB100), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on USB portable audio player/USB memor y operations with this unit which differs from that described in the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Optimum per formance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y . î î î î 1 F older number indicator 2 T rack number indicator 3 Play time indicator 4 MP3/WMA/AAC indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select USB. 2 Press a or b to select a folder . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 4 T o skip back or forward to another compressed audio file, press c or d. A vailable accessori es En 59 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Displaying text information of an audio file The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Displaying text information on disc on page 37. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Selecting files from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Selecting tracks fro m the file name list on page 38. Introduction of advanced operations F or details concerning operation, refer to the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on USB portable audio player/USB memor y operations with this unit which differs from that described in the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Optimum per formance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y . î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RDM indicator Shows when random play is on. 3 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or FLD . % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â P AUSE (pause) â item list # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM, SCAN , P AUSE and item list operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 24. But the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the USB portable audio player/USB memor y are as below: ! TRK â Repeat just the current file ! FLD â Repeat the current folder ! ALL â Repeat all files RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 39. SCAN Refer to Scanning folders and tracks on page 39. P AUSE Refer to Pausing disc playback on page 40. item list Refer to For WMA/MP3/AAC discs in the Selecting tracks from the list on page 40. Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to ALL . A vailable accessori es En 60 Section 04
! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK , the repeat play range changes to FLD. ! When FLD is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! After file or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the files will begin again. Switching the information and title display The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to F or WMA/MP3/AAC discs in the Switch- ing the information and title display on page 41. Multi-CD Player Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a multi- CD player , which is sold separately . ! Only those functions described in this man- ual ar e supported by 50-disc multi-CD players. ! This unit is not designed to operate disc title list functions with a 50-disc multi-CD player . About the disc title list functions, please refer to Selecting discs from the disc title list on page 65. î î î 1 Disc number indicator 2 T rack number indicator 3 Play time indicator 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-CD player . 2 Press a or b to select a disc you want to listen to. # Y ou can also select a disc by using 1 to 6 but- tons. ! F or discs 1 to 6, press the corresponding button number . ! F or discs 7 to 12, press and hold the corre- sponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the dis- play . 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. A vailable accessori es En 61 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- parator y operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR02-XX is displayed, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. Selecting a track directly The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to Se- lecting a track directly on page 36. Introduction of advanced operations Y ou can use COMP (compression and DBE) only with a multi-CD player that supports them. î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RDM indicator Shows when random play is on. 3 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or DSC . Function mode 1 % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂTITLE LIST (disc title list) â RANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â ITS (ITS play) â P AUSE (pause) â COMP (compression and DBE) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Function mode 2 % Press FUNCTION and hold repeatedly to switch between the following functions: TITLE IN (disc title input) âÂÂITS (ITS program- ming) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM, SCAN , P AUSE , COMP and TITLE IN operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 24. But the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the multi- CD player are as below: ! MCD â Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRK â Repeat just the current track ! DSC â Repeat the current disc TITLE LIST Refer to Selecting discs from the disc title list on page 65. RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 39. SCAN Refer to Scanning folders and tracks on page 39. ITS Refer to Using ITS playlists on the next page. P AUSE Refer to Pausing disc playback on page 40. A vailable accessori es En 62 Section 04
Function name Operation COMP Refer to Using compression on page 40. Multi-CD player has DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) function instead of BMX. The settings can be switched as below : COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 â COMP OFFâ DBE 1â DBE 2 TITLE IN Refer to Entering disc titles on page 37. ITS Refer to Using ITS playlists on this page. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MCD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK , the repeat play range changes to DSC. ! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player , you cannot switch to TITLE IN . The disc title has already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. Af ter you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs (with the disc titles). (With multi-CD players sold be- fore the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. P ress a or b to select the CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press FUNCTION to select ITS. # If you select ITS (ITS play) in function mode 1, press and hold FUNCTION to enable you to select ITS directly . 3 Select the desired track by pressing c or d . 4 Press a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi- CD player will begin to play. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 39. 2 Press FUNCTION to select ITS. 3 Press a to turn ITS play on. ITS ON appears in the display . Playback be- gins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. A vailable accessori es En 63 Section 04 A vailable accessories
# If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , press b. Erasing a track from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete a track from your ITS playlist if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. If ITS play is not already on, press FUNCTION . 1 Play the CD with the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until ITS ap- pears in the display . 3 Select the desired track by pressing c or d . 4 Press b to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist if ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. P ress a or b to select the CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press FUNCTION to select ITS. 3 Press b to erase all tracks on the cur - rently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLEAR is dis- played. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the titles. Then you can easily search for and play a de- sired disc. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 100 CD titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi- CD player . Each title can be up to 10 charac- ters long. F or details concerning operation, refer to En- tering disc titles on page 37. ! Titles remain in memor y , even af ter the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is rein- serted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the text information of any disc that has had a disc title entered. The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Displaying text information on disc on page 37. A vailable accessori es En 64 Section 04
Selecting discs from the disc title list Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles that have been entered into the multi- CD player and select one of them to play back. ! Y ou can also per form the following opera- tions by using the joystick. 1 Press FUNCTION to select TITLE LIST. 2 Press c or d to select a disc from the disc title list. # If no title has been entered for a disc, NO D-TITLE will be displayed. 3 Press a to play your favorite CD title. That selection will begin to play . Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Displaying text information on disc on page 37. TV tuner Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. î î î 1 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 2 P reset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 3 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 1 Press SOURCE to select the TV . 2 Press BAND to select a band. P ress BAND until the desired band is dis- played, TV1 or TV2. 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d . The channels move up or down step by step. 4 T o perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing c or d . # If you press and hold c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. A vailable accessori es En 65 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 1 to 6, you can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall with the touch of a but- ton. % When you find a station that you want to store in memory , press one of preset tuning buttons 1 to 6 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you press the same preset tun- ing button the station is recalled from mem- or y . Notes ! Up to 12 stations, six for each of two TV bands can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning numbers P .CH01 to P .CH12 . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSSM. 2 Press a to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, press b. # T o return to the channel display , press BAND. Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the channel display. ! Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using 1 to 6 . A vailable accessori es En 66 Section 04
Bluetooth adapter Y ou can use this unit to control a Bluetooth adapter , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs manuals. This section provides information on Bluetooth telephone/ audio operations with this unit which differs from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs manual. ! This unit is a head unit group 1 unit. â When a Bluetooth wireless connection of a cellular phone or a Bluetooth audio player is established, BT indicator ap- pears in the display. â When a phone call ends, the system re- turns to the previous source. â When a call comes in during sources other than Bluetooth telephone/audio source and the call is being carried on, you cannot use BAND to switch Blue- tooth telephone and Bluetooth audio. Introduction of DVD operation Y ou can use this unit with a separately sold DVD player or multi-DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player â s or multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player â so r multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. Operation Y ou can use the following function with this unit. (Reference page is in this manual.) ! Using ITS playlist and disc title functions â During CD playback when using this unit with a multi-DVD player , you can use these functions. Operation is same as for multi- CD player . Please refer to multi-CD player section. Also, operation of the following function with this unit differs . (Reference page is in this manual.) ! F unction menu switching (Refer to this page.) Function menu switching % During DVD playback, press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂP AUSE (pause) % During Video CD playback, press FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂP AUSE (pause) A vailable accessori es En 67 Section 04 A vailable accessories
% During compressed audio playback, press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â P AUSE (pause) % During CD playback, press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â ITS (ITS play) â P AUSE (pause) Note When using this unit with multi-DVD player , you can switch to ITS . Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments Y ou can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (e.g. DEQ-P6600), which is sold sepa- rately . ! Some functions may differ depending on the multi-channel processor connected to this unit. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer When the separately sold display is connected to this unit When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the setting display will appear on it. In this manual, operations are described with head unit âÂÂs buttons and display . A vailable accessori es En 68 Section 04
Operating the DSP menu î î î 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 Subwoofer indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the DSP func- tion names. P ress AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following DSP functions: FADER (balance adjustment) âÂÂPOSI (position selector) â PLII (Dolby Pro Logic II) â music mode adjust â sound field control â Lo/Ro (down mix) â DRC (dynamic range control) â DIRECT (direct) âÂÂSLA (source level adjust- ment) # Y ou can also use A.MENU button on the re- mote control to select an audio menu. # When the rear output setting is R-SP S/W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 53. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , you cannot use audio functions. Also, equalizer cur ve setting, POSI , AT E Q and T A AUTO T A will be cancelled. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , audio is outputted from front speakers only . # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you cannot switch to PLII . # All audio functions are locked out when the di- rect control is on except VOLUME and PLII . # When you select MUSIC in the PLII , you can select adjusting music mode. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DRC . # When selecting the FM as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FADER. # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speak- er balance. Each press of a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FADER F25 to FADER R25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FADER 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press c or d, BAL 0 is displayed. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL L25 to BAL R25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. A vailable accessori es En 69 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 Press AUDIO to select POSI. 2 Press c/ d/ a/ b to select a listening po- sition. P ress one of these, c/ d/ a/ b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Button Display Position c FRT -L F ront seat left d FRT -R Front seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, press the same button again. Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! If both the center and the rear speakers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 Press AUDIO to select PLII. 2 Press c or d to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF â T urn Dolby Pro Logic II off # Y ou can adjust the music mode only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. Y ou can adjust the music mode only when MUSIC has been selected. When the subwoofer output is on, you can ad- just the cut- off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . ! P anorama ( P ANO ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting â wraparound â effect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSN ) allows you to gra- dually adjust the sound field either towards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER) allows cen- ter-channel sounds to be positioned be- tween the center speaker and the lef t/right speakers. It improves the lef t-center-right stage presentation for both the driver and the front passenger . 1 Press AUDIO to select adjusting music mode. A vailable accessori es En 70 Section 04
2 Press d to select P ANO. P ress a or b to turn P ANO on/off . 3 Press d again to select DIMENSN. Each time you press a or b it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 4 Press d again to select CENTER. Each time you press a or b it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . 3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the lef t/right speakers. Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live per formance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. % Press AUDIO to select the desired SFC mode. P ress c or d repeatedly to switch between the following modes: MUSICAL (musical) âÂÂDRAMA (drama) â ACTION (actio n) âÂÂJAZZ (jazz) âÂÂHALL (hall) â CLUB (club) âÂÂOFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 Press AUDIO to select Lo/Ro. # If the down mix Lt/Rt has been previously se- lected, Lt/Rt will be displayed. 2 Press c or d to switch the down mix settings. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. Using the dyna mic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 1 Press AUDIO to select DRC. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. A vailable accessori es En 71 Section 04 A vailable accessories
2 Press a to turn the dynamic range con- trol on. DRC ON appears in the display . Dynamic range control is now on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , press b. Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME and PLII . 1 Press AUDIO to select DIRECT. 2 Press a to turn the direct control on. DIRCT :ON appears in the display . Direct con- trol is now on. # T o turn direct control off , press b. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the source volume. SLA 4 to SLA âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The MW/L W volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . A vailable accessori es En 72 Section 04
Operating the DSP details menu î î î 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 PL II indicator Shows when the Dolby Pro Logic II is turned on. % Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to display the DSP function names. After AT E Q is displayed, press AUDIO repeat- edly , the following DSP functions appear in the display: AT E Q (auto-equalizer on/off) â FRONT (speak- er setting) â HPF (cross- over frequency) â FRT -L (speaker output level) âÂÂTEST TONE (test tone) â TA (time alignment mode) â FL (time alignment adjustment) â PEQ-2 (3-band para- metric equalizer) # Y ou can also use A.MENU button on the re- mote control to select an audio menu. # When you select T A OFF in T A INTIAL , you cannot select FL. # Y ou cannot select AT E Q if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display . # If auto T A and EQ have not been carried out, SET A.EQ is displayed when AT E Q is selected. 2 Press a to turn the auto-equalizer on. A T EQ ON appears in the display . # T o turn auto-equalizer off , press b. Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto -equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . A vailable accessori es En 73 Section 04 A vailable accessories
! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 69.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to EQ FLA T . (Refer to page 79.) â When a subwoofer is connected to this unit, it will be adjusted automatically to both subwoofer output and high pass fil- ter setting for rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. A vailable accessori es En 74 Section 04
3 T urn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. # P ress SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 70. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, FRT -L is selected automatically . 5 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 6 Press and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro- cessor . 8 Press a to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, press any keys. # T o cancel auto T A and EQ part way through, press BAND. 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, COMPLETE is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (R efer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 84.) 11 Press BAND to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. A vailable accessori es En 75 Section 04 A vailable accessories
12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or malfunction. Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LRG (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SML (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SML or OFF. ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. ! Set the front or rear speaker to LRG if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FRONT. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB.W (subwoofer) â PHASE (subwoofer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . 3 Press a or b to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each press of a or b selects the size in the fol- lowing order: SML (small) âÂÂLRG (large) âÂÂOFF (off) # Y ou cannot select OFF , when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF, when SUB.W (sub- woofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REV (reverse phase) or NOR (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoofer setting) has been selected. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Correcting the subwoofer â s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn âÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FRONT. 2 Press c or d to select the subwoofer . Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB.W (subwoofer) â PHASE (subwoofer setting) 3 Press a to turn the subwoofer output on. 4 Press d to select PHASE (subwoofer setting). 5 Press a or b to select the subwoofer output phase. P ress a to select NOR (normal phase). Press b to select REV (reverse phase). A vailable accessori es En 76 Section 04
6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic II turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SML or LRG and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SML or LRG . Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo- fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SML, you can select a fre- quency , under which sounds are reproduced through a LRG speaker or subwoofer . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select HPF. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: F (front speakers) â C (center speaker) âÂÂR (rear speakers) â S (subwoofer) 3 Press a or b to select cross-over fre- quency for the selected speaker . Each press of a or b selects cross-over fre- quencies in the following order: 63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SML speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LRG or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listen- ing to an audio output. First, use test tone to adjust the approximate speaker level, and then use this function to adjust finely. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FRT -L. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FRT -L (front speaker lef t) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB.W (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on the previous page.) 3 Press a or b to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . A vailable accessori es En 77 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until FRONT ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select TEST TONE. 2 Press d to start the test tone output. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . FRT -L (front speaker lef t) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB.W (subwoofer) # Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 4 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . (Refer to Setting the speak- er setting on page 76.) 3 Press a or b to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 Press c to stop the test tone output. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at FRT -L . Both provide the same re- sults. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select T A. 2 Press c or d to select the time align- ment. ! T A INTIAL â Initial time alignment (factor y setting) ! T A CUSTOM â Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! T A AUTO T A â Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 73.) ! T A OFF â T urn the time alignment off # If auto T A and EQ have not been carried out, SET A.T A is displayed when T A AUTO T A is se- lected. 3 Press BAND to cancel the time align- ment mode. Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. A vailable accessori es En 78 Section 04
! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in T A CUSTOM . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until FRONT ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FL. # When you select T A OFF in T A INTIAL , you cannot select FL. # If a position other than FRT -L or FRT -R is se- lected, CHECK POSI is displayed. T o set the posi- tion, refer to Using the position selector on page 70. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FL (front speaker lef t) âÂÂCENT (center speaker) â FR (front speaker right)â RR (rear speaker right) â RL(rear speaker lef t) â S/W(subwoo- fer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 76.) 3 Press a or b to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the distance. 0.0 to 500.0 is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL (PWRFL) Powerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal EQ FLA T Flat CUSTOM 1 Custom 1 CUSTOM 2 Custom 2 SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Super bass ! CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL (PWRFL) âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL â EQ FLA T âÂÂCUSTOM 1 âÂÂCUSTOM 2 â SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a center frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM 1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM 2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. A vailable accessori es En 79 Section 04 A vailable accessories
! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . We recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select PEQ-2. # Adjusted PEQ-2 settings are memorized in CUSTOM 1 . 2 Press a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of a or b selects the speaker in the following order: FRT (front speakers) âÂÂCENT (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 76.) 3 Press d and then press a or b to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each press of a or b selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) â HI (high) 4 Press d and then press a or b to select the center frequency of selected band. Each press of a or b selects the frequency in the following order: 40 âÂÂ50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 â 250 âÂÂ315 âÂÂ400 âÂÂ500 âÂÂ630 âÂÂ800 âÂÂ1k â 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k âÂÂ5k â 6.3k âÂÂ8k âÂÂ10k âÂÂ12.5k (Hz) 5 Press d and then press a or b to adjust the equalizer level. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the equalizer level. 6 to â 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 6 Press d and then press a or b to select the desired Q factor . Each press a or b switches between the fol- lowing Q factor: WID (wide) âÂÂNAR (narrow) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . 7 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. A vailable accessori es En 80 Section 04
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connections are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly . T urn the unit off and then on. Operation with the remote con- trol isn â t possibl e. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 13) Batter y power is low . Load new batter y . (P age 8) Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (P age 86) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The unit is perform ing still, slow mo - tion or frame-by-frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc â s organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After stopping playback once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly . The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate setting for your display . (P age 48) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Additional Information En 81 Appendix Additional Information
Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 5, P age 93) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 48) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correc t code number . (P age 48) Y ou have forgot ten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P ag e 49) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. Y ou cann ot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in SET -UP MENU . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in SET -UP MENU . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in SET -UP MENU is not recorded on the disc. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in the DVD setup menu. The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in the DVD setup menu. Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in the DVD setup menu is not recorded on the disc. (P age 46) Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cann ot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not pos sible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Additional Information En 82 Appendix
DSP Symptom Cause Action (See) Speakers are not available to be adjusted. Their size settings is at OFF . Make the correct size settings. (P age 76) Time alignme nt is not available. Listening position is not set cor- rectly . Set listening position correctly. (P age 70) Speaker size settings is at OFF . Make the correc t size settings. (P age 76) The subwoofer is not available to switch its phase. The subwoofer is set to OFF . Set the subwoofer to ON. (P age 76) Bass content is not heard. The subwoofer is set to OFF and yet other speakers are set to OFF or SML in size. Make the correct settings. (If no subwoofer is installed, the front or rear speaker needs to be set to LRG.) (P age 76) Ocassionally no sounds are out- put when Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. The center speaker setting is at SML or LRG whereas no center speaker is installed. Change the center speaker size setting to OFF . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only.) (P age 76) Occasionally no sounds are heard over speakers other than the center one. Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. T urn Dolby P ro Logic II off . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby Pro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only .) (P age 70) T urning dynamic range control on has no effects. The currently reproduced sound is not Dolby Digital coded. The feature is only effective on Dolby Digital sounds. (P age 71) No sounds are heard. Optical cables are incorrectly con- nected. Connect the cables correctly. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest P ioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action ERROR02-XX Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. R ERROR The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON-PLA Y This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. HEA T The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 83 Appendix Additional Information
Message Cause Action PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. Error messages on the display Message Cause Action ERROR-02-XX Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Check that the disc is loaded correctly. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION The temperature of this unit is out - side the normal operating range W ait until the unit â s temperature returns to within normal operating limits. DIFFERENT REGION DISC The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. PROTECTED DISC All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action ERR_MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. ERR_FSP , ERR_FLSP , ERR_FRSP , ERR_CSP , ERR_RSP , ERR_RLSP , ERR_RRSP , ERR_SW The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly . ERR_NOIS The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the microphone correctly . Additional Information En 84 Appendix
Understanding messages Messages T ranslati on CAUTION! SCREEN IMAGE MA Y APPEAR REVERSED Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screen image may appear re- versed. Additional Information En 85 Appendix Additional Information
Handling guideline of discs and player ! Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. ! Use 12-cm or 8-cm disc. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 4. ! Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may da- mage the player . ! Do not touch the recorded sur face of the discs. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir- onments including under direct sunlight. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! Condensation may temporarily impair the player âÂÂs per formance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about one hour . Also, wipe any dump discs with a soft cloth. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. ! Read the precautions with discs before using them. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD -RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD -RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs may not be possible be- cause of disc charac teristics, disc format, recorded application, playback environ- ment, storage condi tions and so on. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs ! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back. ! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been re- corded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back. However , unfinalized disc may not be played back. Unplayable disc should be finalized. In ad- dition, finalized DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) disc cannot be recorded/edited. ! DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back. However , this unit is not compatible with Layer Jump recording mode. ! F or more information about recording mode, please contact manufacture of DVD recorder or application. Additional Information En 86 Appendix
! The following logo indicates that this unit is compatible with DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). A VCHD recorded discs ! This unit is not compatible with discs re- corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not be ejected. CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/C D -RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD -R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two -sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro - blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. Compressed au dio files on the disc ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player . ! Multi-session playback is possible. ! Compressed audio files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! Only 64 characters from the beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the extension such as .wma or .mp3) or a folder name. ! F older selection sequence or other opera- tion may be altered depending on the en- coding or writing sof tware. ! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording, compressed audio discs will play with a short pause between songs. ! File extensions such as .wma or .mp3 must be used properly . Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 4 5 6 L e v e l 1 L e v e l 2 L e v e l 3 L e v e l 4 ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on one disc. Compressed au dio compa tibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player V er . 7, 7.1, 8, 9 or 10 ! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Loss- less, Voice: No MP3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (em- phasis: 8 kHz to 48 kHz) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority than V ersion 1.x.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iT unes î version 6.0.5 and earlier ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) ! VBR : No ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz ! Apple Lossless: No DivX video files ! Depending on the file information composi- tion such as the number of audio stream, there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs. ! Some special operation may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files. ! DivX files downloaded only from DivX part- ner site are guarantee of proper operation. Unauthorized DivX file may not operate properly . ! DRM rental file cannot be operated until starting playing back. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also, search operation beyond this time limit is prohibited. ! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback is stopped on the way . ! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this unit to DivX VOD provider . About ID code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD re- gistration code on page 50. ! File extensions such as .avi or .divx must be used properly. ! F or more details about DivX, visit the follow- ing site: http://www .divx.com/ DivX compatibility ! Compatible format: DivX video format im- plemented in relation to DivX standards ! DivX Ultra format: No ! DivX files without video data: No ! Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital ! LPCM: No ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Compatible external subtitle file extension: .srt Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, P ushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyar wanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo- Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T on ga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Malte se (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 06 10 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl) , 1612 Additional Information En 90 Appendix
T erms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com- pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down- load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to -use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band- width output channels from two-channel sources. This new technology enables a dis- crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan- nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. DVD-VR DVD- VR (Video Recording) format enables you to edit directly to the DVD video disc. DVD- VR formats allow you to add new video, change menus, add chapters, split clip, remove video segments and move. Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and sof test sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume le- vels. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 charac ters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation , which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â sof t- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD -ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Additional Information En 92 Appendix
Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit â s parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit âÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsof t Corporation . WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
Specifications General Po w e r s o u r c e ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ................... N e g a tive type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 1 m m N o s e ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à1 9 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m N o s e ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à1 5 m m We i g h t .......................................... 1 . 4 k g Audio Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Continuous power output . . . 22 W à4 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5% THD, 4 W load, both channels driven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ4 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ2 2 W ÃÂ1 P reout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 2 . 2 V / 1 k W Equalizer (7-Band Graphic Equa lizer): Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/125/315/800/2k/5k/12.5k Hz G a i n ...................................... ñ 1 2 d B Loudness contour: L o w ....................................... 3 . 5 d B (100 Hz), 3 dB (10 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) H i g h ..................................... 1 1 d B (100 Hz), 11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: â 30 dB) HPF : Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 18 dB/oct G a i n ...................................... 6 d B t o â 24 dB Phase .................................. N o r m a l / R everse Bass boost: G a i n ...................................... 1 2 d B t o 0 d B DVD Player System .......................................... D V D v i d e o , D V D -V R, V i d e o CD, CD, WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX system Region number ........................ 2 U s a b l e d i s c s .............................. D V D v i d e o , V i d e o C D , dtsCD, CD, CD-R/RW , DVD- R/RW Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 16/22.05/24/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency response ............... 5 H z t o 4 4 0 0 0 H z ( w i t h DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) S i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o ............... 9 7 d B ( 1 k H z ) ( I E C - A n e t - work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) D y n a m i c ra n g e ......................... 9 5 d B ( 1 k H z ) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz) Output level: V i d e o .................................... 1 . 0 V p - p / 7 5 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo) DivX decoding format ............ H o m e T h e a t e r Ve r. 3 , 4 , 5 . 2 (.avi .divx) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ve r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT unes î en- coded only) FM tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) S i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o ............... 7 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t w ork) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 k H z , stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency response ............... 3 0 H z t o 1 5 0 0 0 H z ( ñ 3 d B ) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 k H z ) MW tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 5 3 1 k H z t o 1 6 0 2 k H z ( 9 k H z ) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) S i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o ............... 6 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t w ork) Additional Information En 94 Appendix
L W tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 1 5 3 k H z t o 2 8 1 k H z Usable sensitivity ..................... 3 0 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t w o r k ) Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 95 Appendix Additional Information
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-91 20 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ : å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 : (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporat ion. Copyright é 2007 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Thailand <CRB2390-A/N> EW <K OKZX> <07B00000>
Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model prope rly . After you have finished reading the instructio ns, keep this man- ual in a safe pla ce for futu r e refer ence . Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 4 ! DVD video disc region numbers 5 ! When an operation is prohibited 7 Precautions T o ensure safe driving 3 Before Y ou Start About this unit 4 About this manual 5 Visit our website 5 In case of trouble 5 F eatures 5 What the marks on DVDs indicate 7 P rotecting your unit from theft 7 Use and care of the remote control 8 Operating this unit What âÂÂs What 10 Basic Operations 14 T uner 15 Playing DVD video discs 19 Playing Video CDs 27 Playing DivX files 31 Playing CDs 36 Audio Adjustments 42 Setting up the DVD player 46 Initial Settings 51 Other F unctions 55 Available accessories Playing songs on iP od 57 Playing songs on USB portable audio player/ USB memory 59 Multi-CD Player 61 TV tuner 65 Bluetooth adapter 67 Introduction of DVD operation 67 Digital Signal P rocessor 68 Additional Infor mation T roubleshoo ting 81 Error messages 83 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 84 Understanding messages 85 Handling guideline of discs and player 86 DVD discs 86 DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 86 AVCHD recorded discs 87 CD-R/CD-RW discs 87 Dual Discs 87 Compressed audio files on the disc 87 DivX video files 88 Language code chart for DVD 90 T erms 91 Specifications 94 Contents En 2
T o ensur e safe driving WARNING ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. ! NEVER install the display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or Video CD while driving. When you park your car in a safe place and apply the parking brake, the picture appears on the screen. Precautions En 3 Section 01 Precautions
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a se- parate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that re- quires proper treatment, recover y and recy- cling. P rivate households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Nor way may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retai- ler (if you purchase a similar new one). F or countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal. By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessar y treatment, recover y and recycling and thus prevent po - tential negative effects on the environment and human health. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo- cated for use in W estern Europe, Asia, the Middle East, Africa and Oceania. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. The RDS (radio data system) function operates only in areas with FM stations broadcasting RDS sig- nals. CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! â CLASS 1 L ASER PRODUCTâ This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personnel. ! The P ioneer CarStereo-P ass is for use only in Germany . ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Before Y ou Start En 4 Section 02
Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: ! Register your product. We will keep the de- tails of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or thef t. ! W e offer the latest information about P ioneer Corporation on our website. In case of trouble Should this product fail to operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized P ioneer Ser vice Station. Features DVD-R/RW compatibility It is possible to play back DVD -R/RW discs re- corded with the video format and Video Re- cording format. (Refer to DVD-R/DVD-RW discs on page 86.) Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). WMA, MP3 and AAC compatibility Refer to Compressed audio compatibility on page 88. DivX î video compatibility Refer to DivX compatibility on page 89. Before Y ou Start En 5 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a Pioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music sof tware featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories . âÂÂDolby âÂÂ, â P ro Logic âÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories . ! â DTSâ and â DTS Digital Outâ are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. iPod î compatibility When you use this unit with an inter face adap- ter for iP od (CD -IB100 B) (sold separately), you can control an iPod with Dock Connector . ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation . Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Windows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsof t Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. About MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad- casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic con- tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An indepen- dent license for such use is required. For de- tails, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. About AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Before Y ou Start En 6 Section 02
Several applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions dif- fer depending on the application which is used to encode. This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes î version 6.0.5 . ! iT unes is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre- ated by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitles âÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD -R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti- cal order . Official DivX î Certified product Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to-height ratio) type. 2 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached to deter theft. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attach- ing. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Before Y ou Start En 7 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Removing the front panel 1 Press DET ACH to release the front panel. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. 3 Put the front panel into provided pro- tective case for safe keeping. Attaching the front panel 1 Slide the front panel to the left until it clicks. F ront panel and the head unit are jointed on the lef t side. Make sure that the front panel has been jointed to the head unit. 2 Press the right side of the front panel until it is firmly seated. # If you can âÂÂt attach the front panel to the head unit successfully , tr y again. F ront panel may be damaged if you attach the front panel forcedly . Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray. WARNING Keep the battery out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y. ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Danger of explosion if batter y is incorrectly re- placed. Replace only with the same or equiva- lent type. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions â rules that apply in your countr y/area. ! Always check carefully that you are loading the batter y with its plus ( ) and minus ( âÂÂ) poles facing in the proper directions. Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
What â s What Head unit 1 AUDIO button P ress to select various sound quality con- trols. 2 BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and MW/L W bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. 3 SOURCE button, VOLUME This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Rotate it to increase or decrease the vo- lume. 4 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play . 5 EJECT button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. 6 T A button P ress to turn T A function on or off . P ress and hold to turn AF function on or off . 7 AUX1 input jack (3.5 mm stereo/video jack) Use to connect an auxiliar y equipmen t. 8 DET ACH button P ress to remove the front panel from the head unit. 9 EQ button P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. a SW button P ress to select the subwoofer setting menu. P ress and hold to select the bass boost set- ting menu. b 1 to 6 buttons These buttons can per form the same opera- tion as NUMBER (1 to 6) buttons on the re- mote control. Press for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi- CD/ DVD player . c a /b /c /d buttons P ress to per form manual seek tuning, fast forward, reverse and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. d DISPLA Y button P ress to select different displays. e FUNCTION button P ress to select functions. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î Operating this unit En 10 Section 03
Remote control Button names DVH mode DVD and S-DVD mode 1 SOURCE button P ress to cycle through all the available sour ces. P ress and hold to turn the source off . 2A T T button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. Press once more to return to the ori- ginal volume level. 3 VOLUME but- tons P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 4 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio language during DVD playback. SUBTITLE but- ton P ress to change the subtitle language during DVD playback. ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. 5 AUTO PLA Y button P ress to turn the DVD auto -playback function on or off . 6 RETURN button P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î Operating this unit En 11 Section 03 Operating this unit
Button names DVH mode DVD and S-DVD mode 7 BOOKMARK button P ress to operate the preprogrammed functions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 56.) P ress to turn the bookmark functio n on or off . For details , refer to Resume play- back (Bookmark) on page 23. 8 Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between DVD , S-DVD and DVH modes . Normally , set to DVH . F or details, refer to Using the r emote control operation mode switc h on the next page. 9 CM BACK /CM SKIP P ress to skip progressively backward/for ward through the video playing. 10 DIRECT button P ress to do direct channel select. Not used. 11 A.MENU but- ton F unctions are the same as AUDIO button on the head unit. P ress to select various sound quality controls. 12 FUNCTION but- ton P ress to select functions. 13 NUMBER but- ton, CLEAR but- ton P ress 0 to 9 to input numbers. Buttons 1 to 6 can operate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc changing for multi-DVD player or multi- CD player . P ress CLEAR to clear the input numbers. P ress to select a menu item on the Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). 14 BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and to cancel the control mode of functions. P ress to switch between media file types. (Refer to Switching the media file type on page 15.) 15 DISPLA Y but- ton P ress to turn the information display on or off when the video is displayed. Depending on the selected source, pressing this button can switch the display indication on the head unit. 16 PLA Y/P AUSE ( f ) button P ress to switch sequentially betwee n playback and pause. REVERSE ( m) button P ress to per form fast reverse. FORW ARD ( n ) button P ress to per form fast for ward. PREVIOUS ( o ) button P ress to return to the previous track (chapter). NEXT ( p) button P ress to go to the next track (chapter). STEP ( r/ q) buttons P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback . P ress and hold for one second to activate slow playback. If a DVD-VR disc contains a still image, press r while displaying a still image to switch to the next image or video. STOP ( g ) but- ton Not used. P ress to stop playback. Operating this unit En 12 Section 03
Button names DVH mode DVD and S-DVD mode 17 Move the Joy- stick F unctions are the same as a /b /c /d buttons. Move to do fast forward, revers e and track search controls. Also used for controlling functions. Move to select a menu on the DVD menu. Click the Joy- stick Click to display the disc title list, track title list, folder list or file list depending on the source. Click to select a menu on the DVD menu. 18 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback . TOP MENU button P ress to return to the top menu during DVD playback . Using the remote control operation mode switch There are three remote contro l operation modes on the remote control. If you want to operate this unit by remote control, turn the mode switch to DVH mode. In this case, both the head unit â s buttons and remote control can control this unit. DVH mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to DVH. ! The joystick on the remote control can per- form the same operations as a/ b/ c/ d but- tons. ! Numbers ( 1 to 6) can per form the same op- erations as 1 to 6 buttons on the head unit. â If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 to 6 , press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display. DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD , the joystick and 0 to 10 operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Basic operation of DVD video on page 19.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using 0 to 10 . (Refer to Watching a Video CD on page 27.) ! When specifying title or track by using NUMBER . (Refer to Specifying title on page 20 and Specifying track on page 27.) ! When operating the DVD setup menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Setting up the DVD player on page 46.) S-DVD mode operation Set to S-DVD mode if separately sold DVD player or Multi-DVD player is controlled by this remote control. S-DVD mode operation are basically the same as that of the DVD mode operation. If P ioneer DVD player (SDV -P7) is connected to this unit as a source DVD player , remote control code setting should be A in the initial settings of SDV -P7. Other wise, the supplied remote control cannot control SDV -P7. Operating this unit En 13 Section 03 Operating this unit
Basic Operations Power ON/OFF T ur ning the unit on % Press SOURCE to tur n the unit on. T ur ning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. Selecting a source % Press SOURCE repeatedly to switch be- tween the following sources: TUNER (tuner) âÂÂTELEVISION (television) â DVD (built-in DVD player) âÂÂS-DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) â MUL TI CD (multi- CD player) â IPOD (iPod) â USB (USB) â EXTERNAL (external unit 1) âÂÂEXTERNAL (ex- ternal unit 2) â AUX1 (AUX 1) â AUX2 (AUX 2) â BLUETOOTH (Bluetooth telephone/audio) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: â When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. â When there is no disc or magazine in the player . â When the AUX (auxiliary input) is set to off (refer to page 52). ! AUX1 is set to AUDIO by default. Set the AUX1 to OFF when not in use (refer to Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 52). ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit âÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the car âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control term- inal, the car âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the an- tenna, turn the source off . (When you con- nected a P ioneer multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) to this unit, auto -antenna cannot be controled.) Built-in DVD player basic operations Playing a disc % Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. # If you are playing a DVD or Video CD, a menu may appear . Refer to Basic operation of DVD video on page 19 and Basic operation of Video CD on page 27. # When the automatic playback function is on, this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 23. # Y ou can eject a disc by pressing EJECT. Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 4. ! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 23. ! If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Refer to Switching the media file type on the next page. Operating this unit En 14 Section 03
! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FRMT READ is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR02-XX is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 83. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD -R/RW/ROM discs. â Audio data (CD -DA) â Compressed audio files â DivX video files ! In case of DVD -R/RW/ROM, this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA). % Press BAND to switch between media file types. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T uner Basic Operations When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. This unit âÂÂs AF (alternative frequencies search) function can be turned on and off . AF should be off for normal tuning operation (refer to page 17). RDS RDS (radio data system) contains inaudible in- formations that helps searching of the radio stations. ! RDS ser vice may not be provided by all sta- tions. ! RDS functions such as AF and T A are only active when your radio is tuned to an RDS station. î î î î î î î î î 1 TA indicator Shows when T A (traffic announcement stand- by) function is on. 2 P rogram ser vice name 3 F requency indicator 4 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. 5 TP indicator Shows when a TP station is tuned in. 6 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. Operating this unit En 15 Section 03 Operating this unit
Non-RDS or MW/L W î î î î î 1 Band indicator 2 P reset number indicator 3 F requency indicator 4 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner . 2 Press BAND to select a band. P ress BAND until the desired band is dis- played, FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or MW/L W . 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d . 4 T o perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing c or d . # If you press and hold c or d you can skip sta- tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 1 to 6 you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six MW/L W stations can be stored in memor y . % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory , press one of pre- set tuning buttons 1 to 6 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you press the same preset tun- ing button the radio station frequency is re- called from memor y . # Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio sta- tion frequencies assigned to preset tuning but- tons 1 to 6 . Introduction of advanced operations î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: BSM (best stations memor y) âÂÂREG (regional) â LOCAL (local seek tuning)â TA (traffic an- nouncement standby) â AF (alternative fre- quencies search) # If MW/L W band is selected, you can only se- lect BSM or LOCAL . # T o return to the frequency display , press BAND . # If you do not operate functions within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Operating this unit En 16 Section 03
Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning buttons 1 to 6. Once stored you can tune in to those frequen- cies with the touch of button. ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using buttons 1 to 6. 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSM. 2 Press a to turn BSM on. Six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored in the order of their signal strength. # T o cancel the storage process, press b. T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LOCAL. 2 Press a to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display . # T o turn local seek tuning off , press b. 3 Press c or d to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for MW/L W : FM: LOCAL 1 âÂÂLOCAL 2 âÂÂLOCAL 3 â LOCAL 4 MW/L W : LOCAL 1 âÂÂLOCAL 2 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Selecting alternati ve frequencies When the tuner can âÂÂt get good reception, the unit automatically search for a different sta- tion in a same network. % Press and hold T A repeatedly to tur n AF (alternative frequency search) on or off. Notes ! Y ou can also turn the AF function on or off in the menu that appears with the pressing of FUNCTION . ! Only RDS stations are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when AF is on. ! When you recall a preset station, the tuner may update the preset station with a new fre- quency from the station âÂÂs AF list. (This is only available when using presets on the FM1 band.) No preset number appears on the dis- play if the RDS data for the station received differs from that for the originally stored sta- tion. ! Sound may be temporarily interrupted by an- other program during an AF frequency search. ! AF can be turned on or off independently for each FM band. Using PI Seek If the tuner can âÂÂt find a suitable station, or re- ception status becomes bad, the unit will auto- matically search for a different station with a same programming. During the search, PI SEEK is displayed and the output is muted. Using Auto PI Seek for preset stations When preset stations cannot be recalled, as when travelling long distances, the unit can be set to per form PI Seek during preset recall. ! The default setting for Auto PI Seek is off . See Switching A uto PI Seek on page 52. Operating this unit En 17 Section 03 Operating this unit
Limiting stations to regional programming When AF is used, the regional function limits the selection of stations broadcasting regional programs. 1 Press FUNCTION to select REG. 2 Press a or b to turn the regional func- tion on or off. Notes ! Regional programming and regional networks are organized differently depending on the countr y (i.e., they may change according to the hour , state or broadcast area). ! The preset number may disappear from the display if the tuner tunes in a regional station which differs from the originally set station. ! The regional function can be turned on or off independently for each FM band. Receiving traffic announc ements T A (traffic announcement standby) lets you re- ceive traffic announcements automatically , no matter what source you are listening to. T A can be activated for both a TP station (a sta- tion that broadcasts traffic information) or an enhanced other network âÂÂs TP station (a station carr ying information which cross-references TP stations). 1 T une in a TP or enhanced other net- work â s TP station. TP indicator will light. 2 Press T A to turn traffic announcement standby on. # T o turn traffic announcements standby off , press TA again. 3 Use VOLUME to adjust the T A volume when a traffic announcement begins. The newly set volume is stored in memor y and recalled for subsequent traffic announce- ments. 4 Press T A while a traffic announcement is being received to cancel the announce- ment. The tuner returns to the original source but re- mains in the standby mode until TA is pressed again. # Y ou can also cancel the announcement by pressing SOURCE, BAND , a, b, c or d while a traffic announcement is being received. Notes ! Y ou can also turn the T A function on or off in the menu that appears with the pressing of FUNCTION . ! The system switches back to the original source following traffic announcement recep- tion. ! Only TP and enhanced other network âÂÂs TP sta- tions are tuned in during seek tuning or BSM when T A is on. Switching the RDS display % Press DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: P rogram ser vice name âÂÂPTY information â F requency PTY (program type ID code) information is listed on the next page. # PTY information and the frequency appear on the display for eight seconds. # If a PTY code of zero is received from a station or the signal is too weak for this unit to pick up the PTY code, you cannot switch to PTY informa- tion display. Operating this unit En 18 Section 03
Receiving PTY alarm broadcasts When the emergency PTY code broadcasts, the unit receives it automatically ( ALM ap- pears). When the broadcasting ends, the sys- tem returns to the previous source. ! An emergency announcement can be can- celed by pressing TA . PTY list Specific T ype of program NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information and advice SPORT Sports WEA THER W eather reports/meteorological infor- mation FINANCE Stock market reports, commerce , trading, etc. POP MUS P opular music ROCK MUS Contemporar y modern music EASY MUS Easy listening music OTH MUS Non-categorized music JAZZ Jazz COUNTRY Countr y music NA T MUS National music OLDIES Oldies, golden oldies FOLK MUS F olk music L.CLASS Light classical music CLASSIC Classical music EDUCA TE Educational programs DRAMA Radio plays and serials CUL TURE National or regional culture SCIENCE Nature, science and technology V ARIED Light entertainment CHILDREN Children âÂÂs SOCIAL Soc ial affair s RELIGION Religious affairs or ser vices PHONE IN Phone in TOURING T ravel progra ms; not for traffic an- nouncements LEISURE Hobbies and recreational activities DOCUMENT Documentaries Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video Read the precautions with discs and player on Handling guideline of discs and player on page 86. î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. 2 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current chapter . 4 Media indicator 5 DVD-VR indicator 6 Dolby Digital indicator Shows the Dolby Digital is on when the multi- channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. 7 dts indicator Shows the DTS is on when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit. Basic operation of DVD video 1 Use the joystick to select the desired menu option. When the DVD offers a menu, a menu is dis- played. # This function is available for DVD video. 2 Click the joystick. Playback starts from the selected menu item. Operating this unit En 19 Section 03 Operating this unit
# Y ou can display the menu by pressing the MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is playing. P ressing either of these buttons again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro - vided with the disc. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward con- tinues even if you release m or n. T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. # There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next chapter . P ressing o once skips to the start of the current chapter . Pressing again will skip to the previous chapter . Chapter numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. 5 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop DVD playback by pressing g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying title T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired title. Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in that order . Selecting a chapter directly When using the remote control, you can select a chapter directly by entering the desired chapter number . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. 1 Press DIRECT. Chapter number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired chapter number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The chapter of entered number will play . Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. Operating this unit En 20 Section 03
% Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! If a DVD- VR disc contains a still image, press r while displaying a still image to switch to the next image or video. ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . 2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. 1 Press AUDIO during playback. The audio selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press AUDIO while the audio selection icon is displayed. The audio changes each time you press AUDIO . Operating this unit En 21 Section 03 Operating this unit
Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs package indicates the number of recorded languages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD setup menu. For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 47. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit âÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Changing the subtitle langu age during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. 1 Press SUBTITLE during playback. The subtitle selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press SUBTITLE while the subtitle selec- tion icon is displayed. The subtitle language changes each time you press SUBTITLE . Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD âÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD setup menu. F or details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 46. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting the angle icon display on page 48. 1 Press ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. The angle icon and angle number are displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press ANGLE while the angle icon and angle number are displayed. The angle changes each time you press ANGLE . Notes ! The 3 mark on a DVD âÂÂs package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! P ressing ANGLE during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback, but the viewing angle does not change. Operating this unit En 22 Section 03
Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! This function is available for DVD video. % During playback, press BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to five discs. Af ter that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press and hold BOOKMARK during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding EJECT at the point you want to bookmark. Next time you load the disc, playback will resume from the bookmarked point. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method. T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press EJECT. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % Press AUTO PLA Y to turn automatic playback on. A.PLA Y ON is displayed. # T o turn automatic playback off , press AUTO PLA Y again. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on the next page). CM skip/CM back This function skips a reproduced image for a specified time. If the currently playing disc contains commercials, it is possible to skip them. % T o skip progressively backward or for - ward, press CM BACK or CM SKIP. Each time you press CM BACK or CM SKIP it changes steps in the following order: CM back 5 sec. â 15 sec. âÂÂ30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. CM skip 30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ1.5 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. âÂÂ5.0 min. âÂÂ10.0 min. After displaying the selected option for two seconds, reproduced image skips. # If you do not operate the function within about eight seconds, the display is automatically re- turned. Return to the specified scene Y ou can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. ! This function is available for DVD video. % Press RETURN to return to the specified scene. # If a specified scene has not been prepro- grammed in DVD disc, this function is not possi- ble. Selecting the title list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Operating this unit En 23 Section 03 Operating this unit
The title list lets you see the list of titles on a playing DVD - VR disc. The title list is displayed when playing DVD - VR disc with both original mode and playlist mode. Y ou can easily select a desired title from the title list. ! This function is available for DVD - VR . ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the title name list. Titles can also be selected by using the a/ b/ c/ d buttons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting the title list on the next page. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of ti- tles. 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the desired title. 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired title. When you select the title, that selection will begin to play . # Y ou can also select the title by clicking the joy- stick. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent chapter (title). % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: For DVD video REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂLR SEL (audio output) â P AUSE (pause) âÂÂCOMP (compression) For DVD - VR discs REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂLR SEL (audio output) â P AUSE (pause) âÂÂitem list âÂÂCOMP (com- pression) â PLA YLIST (playlist) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the DVD playback : DSC (disc repeat), CPT (chapter re- peat), and TTL (title repeat). 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat the current disc ! TTL â Repeat just the current title ! CPT â Repeat just the current chapter # If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/ reverse during CPT, the repeat play range changes to DSC. # Y ou cannot operate repeating play when DVD AUTO PLA Y is on (refer to Automatic play- back of DVDs on the previous page). Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LR SEL. Operating this unit En 24 Section 03
2 Press c or d to select the desired set- ting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R â Left and right ! L â Left ! R â Right ! MIX â mixing left and right Note This function is possible only with Linear PCM sound. Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. # T o turn pause off , press b. Selecting the title list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. The title list lets you see the list of titles on a playing DVD - VR disc. The title list is displayed when playing DVD - VR disc with both original mode and playlist mode. Y ou can easily select a desired title from the title list. ! This function is available for DVD - VR . ! Y ou can also display the title name list by clicking the joystick. Titles can also be se- lected by using the joystick. Refer to Select- ing the title list on page 23. 1 Press FUNCTION to select the title list. P ress FUNCTION until the title list appears in the display. 2 Press a or b to scroll through the list of titles. 3 Press d to select the desired title. When you select the title, that selection will begin to play . 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Selecting the play mode Y ou have two methods for playing DVD - VR disc; ORIGINAL (original) and PLA YLIST (play- list). ! Titles created with DVD recorders are called original. Based on original, rear - ranged titles are called playlist. Playlists are created on DVD -R/RW discs. ! PLA YLIST can only be selected when a disc that has a playlist is played. ! This function is available for DVD - VR . 1 Press FUNCTION to select the play mode. P ress FUNCTION until ORIGINAL or PLA YLIST appears in the display. 2 Press c or d to select the play mode. ORIGINAL âÂÂPLA YLIST # If the play mode is changed, playback starts from the beginning of the selected play mode. Operating this unit En 25 Section 03 Operating this unit
Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon 2 Media indicator 3 Title number indicator 4 Chapter number indicator 5 Play time indicator 6 V ariable message area DVD video: shows the audio language, subti- tle language, viewing angle, repeat range and speaker output channel. DVD- VR : shows the play mode, audio system, speaker output channel, subtitle setting and repeat range. 7 Title display Shows the name of the currently playing title. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: For DVD video Information display 1 âÂÂInformation dis- play 2 â Normal playback display For DVD - VR discs Information display 1 âÂÂInformation dis- play 2 â Title display âÂÂNormal playback display # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Operating this unit En 26 Section 03
Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD Read the precautions with discs and player on Handling guideline of discs and player on page 86. î î î î 1 T rack number indicator Shows the track number currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current track. 3 Media indicator Basic operation of Video CD 1 Press NUMBER to select the desired menu option. When a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function starts playing, a menu is dis- played. ! Playback starts from the selected menu item. ! When the menu is two or more pages long, press o or p to switch between dis- plays. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # PBC playback of Video CD cannot be can- celled. # Operation with the joystick is not possible. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward con- tinues even if you release m or n. T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. P ressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Using NUMBER also per forms the same op- eration. For more details, refer to Specifying track on this page. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop Video CD playback by pressing g , that location on the disc is memorized en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying track T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired track. T rack number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected track. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10 , 10 and 3 in that order . Operating this unit En 27 Section 03 Operating this unit
Notes ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played and operation may not be possible. ! With Video CD, direct search is not possible during PBC playback. Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press 0 to 9 buttons to enter the desired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play . Notes ! After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be op- erated. Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Operating this unit En 28 Section 03
2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂLR SEL (audio output) â P AUSE (pause) âÂÂCOMP (compression) ! During PBC (Playback Control) playback, you cannot select REPEA T . ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you play the same track over again. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat the current disc ! TRK â Repeat just the current track # If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. 1 Press FUNCTION to select LR SEL. 2 Press c or d to select the desired set- ting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R â Left and right ! L â Left ! R â Right ! MIX â mixing left and right Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current track pauses. Operating this unit En 29 Section 03 Operating this unit
# T o turn pause off , press b. Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Switching the information display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon 2 Media indicator 3 T rack number indicator 4 Play time indicator 5 Repeat indicator 6 Speaker output channel indicator % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂNormal playback display # When a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function starts playing, PLA YBACK CON- TROL ON will be displayed instead of track num- ber indicator and play time indicator . Operating this unit En 30 Section 03
Playing DivX files W atching a DivX These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DivX with your DVD player . More advanced DivX operation is explained starting on page 34. î î î î 1 F older number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing. 2 File number indicator Shows the file number currently playing. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the current file. 4 Media indicator Basic Operations 1 Press a or b to select a folder . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release m or n .T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast for ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. # This is fast for ward and reverse operation only for the file being played. This operation is can- celed when the previous or next file is reached. 3 T o skip back or forward to another file, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next file. P ressing o once skips to the start of the cur- rent file. Pressing again will skip to the pre- vious file. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Notes ! This DVD player can play back a DivX file re- corded on CD- R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ ROM. (Refer to page 88 for files that can be played back.) ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! There is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. Selecting a file directly When using the remote control, you can select a file directly by entering the desired file num- ber . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. 1 Press DIRECT. File number input display appears. 2 Press 0 to 9 buttons to enter the desired file number . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The file of entered number will play . Operating this unit En 31 Section 03 Operating this unit
# After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD conte nt, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), EXPIRED is displayed. ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim- ited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the con- tent as of ten as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . About your regis- tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code on page 50. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. % If the message is displayed after load- ing a disc containing DivX VOD content, press f. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, press p. # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, press g. Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during DivX playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Slow motion playback When playing DivX video file, this lets you slow down playback speed. Operating this unit En 32 Section 03
% Press r and hold during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) When playing a DivX video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. 1 Press AUDIO during playback. The audio selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press AUDIO while the audio selection icon is displayed. The audio changes each time you press AUDIO . Note P ressing AUDIO during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Selecting files from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the list of files (or folders). File can also be selected by using the a/ b/ c/ d but- tons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting files fro m the file name list on the next page. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of files (or folders). 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the list of file names (or folder names). 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play. When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . # Y ou can also select a file name (or folder name) by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), move the joystick lef t. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Operating this unit En 33 Section 03 Operating this unit
Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or FLD . % Press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂP AUSE (pause) âÂÂitem list â COMP (comp) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or DivX video file playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FLD (folder repeat), TRK (file repeat) and DSC (repeat all files). 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat all files ! TRK â Repeat just the current file ! FLD â Repeat the current folder # If you per form file search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK , the repeat play range changes to FLD . # If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. # When FLD (folder repeat) is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current file pauses. # T o turn pause off , press b. Selecting files from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! Y ou can also display the list of files (or folders) by clicking the joystick. File can also be selected by using the joystick. Refer to Selecting files fr om the file name list on the previous page. 1 Press FUNCTION to select a file name list. P ress FUNCTION until the names of files or folders appears in the display . 2 Press a or b to scroll through the list of file names (or folder names). 3 Press d to select the desired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play. When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . Operating this unit En 34 Section 03
# T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), press c. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . # If you do not operate the list within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the ordinar y display . Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. 1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon When playing a disc containing various data format, MIXED appear on it. 2 Media indicator 3 F older number indicator 4 File number indicator 5 Play time indicator 6 Audio system indecator 7 Subtitle number indicator 8 Repeat indicator 9 Title display Shows the name of the currently playing file. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂTitle display âÂÂNor- mal playback display # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Operating this unit En 35 Section 03 Operating this unit
Playing CDs Listening to a CD Read the precautions with discs and player on Handling guideline of discs and player on page 86. î î î î î î 1 F older number indicator Shows the folder number currently playing when the compressed audio is playing. 2 T rack (file) number indicator 3 Play time indicator 4 Media indicator 5 MP3/WMA/AAC indicator Shows the type of audio file currently playing when the compressed audio is playing. Basic Operations 1 Press a or b to select a folder when playing a compressed audio. # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. # Y ou can also per form fast for ward or reverse by pressing and holding m or n on the re- mote control. # If you select ROUGH , pressing and holding c or d enables you to search ever y 10 tracks in the current folder . (Refer to Searching ever y 10 tracks in the current disc or folder on page 40.) 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another track by pressing o or p on the remote con- trol. Notes ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FRMT READ is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR02-XX is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 83. ! When playing CD-EXTRA or MIXED-MODE CDs, compressed audio and CD- DA can be switched by pressing BAND. ! If you have switched between compressed audio and CD-DA, playback starts at the first track on the disc. ! When playing back VBR (variable bit rate) re- corded files, elapsed play time may not be dis- played correctly . ! When playing compressed audio, there is no sound on fast for ward or reverse. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVH mode. ! When audio files are being played back, you can select track in the current folder . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. Operating this unit En 36 Section 03
2 Press 0 to 9 buttons to enter the desired track number . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play . # After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically canceled. Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 48 CD titles in the unit. Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 Play the CD that you want to enter a title for . 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . # When playing a CD TEXT disc, you cannot switch to disc title input display . The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. # When playing compressed audio disc, you cannot switch to disc title input display . 3 Press a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. Each press of a will display alphabet, num- bers or symbols in ascending order ( A B C ...). Each press of b will display a letter in des- cending order . 4 Press d to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press d to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . Press c to move backwards in the display. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing d after entering the title. When you press d one more time, the entered title is stored in memor y . 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! Titles remain in memor y , even after the disc has been removed from the unit, and are re- called when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. ! If you connect a multi-CD player , you can input disc titles for up to 100 discs. ! When a multi-CD player that does not support disc title functions is connected, you cannot enter disc titles in this unit. Displaying text information on disc % Press DISPLA Y to select the desired text information. For title entered CD T rack number â DISC TITLE (disc title) For CD TEXT discs T rack number â DISC TITLE (disc title) â DSC ARTIST (disc artist name) âÂÂTRK TITLE (track title) â TRK ARTIST (track artist name) Operating this unit En 37 Section 03 Operating this unit
For WMA/MP3/AAC discs F older number and file number â ALBM TITLE (album title) â TRK TITLE (track title) â FLDR NAME (folder name) âÂÂFILE NAME (file name) â ART NAME (artist name) # When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the information of currently playing disc will appear on it. # Elapsed play time is always shown on the dis- play . Notes ! Y ou can scroll to the left of the title by pressing and holding DISPLA Y . ! Audio CD that contains certain information such as text and/or number is CD TEXT . ! If specific information has not been recorded on a disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME ). ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! When Ever Scroll is set to ON at the initial set- ting, text information scrolls continuously in the display . Refer to Switching the Ever Scroll on page 53. Selecting tracks from the track title list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. T rack title list lets you see the list of track titles on a CD TEXT disc and select one of them to play back. ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the track name list. T racks can also be selected by using a/ b/ c/ d buttons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting tracks from the list on page 40. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of track titles. 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the desired track title. 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired track title. When you select a track, the selection will begin to play . # Y ou can also select the track by clicking the joystick. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . Selecting tracks from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! Y ou can also use the function menu to dis- play the list of files (or folders). File can also be selected by using the a/ b/ c/ d but- tons on the head unit. Refer to Selecting tracks fr om the list on page 40. 1 Click the joystick to display the list of files (or folders). 2 Move the joystick up or down to change the list of file names (or folder names). 3 Move the joystick right to select the de- sired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play. Operating this unit En 38 Section 03
When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . # Y ou can also select a file name (or folder name) by clicking the joystick. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), move the joystick lef t. 4 Press DISPLA Y to return to the ordinary display . Introduction of advanced operations F ollowing functions can be operated during playback. î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or FLD . 3 RDM indicator Shows when random play is on. % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â P AUSE (pause) â item list â SCH (search method) â COMP (compression) # T o return to the ordinar y display , press BAND . Selecting a r epeat play range Repeat play plays the same track/folder within the selected repeat play range. Also, the repeat range determines the range of random play and scan play . 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! DSC â Repeat all tracks ! TRK â Repeat just the current track ! FLD â Repeat the current folder # If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to disc repeat. # When playing CD, per forming track search or fast for ward/reverse cancels the repeat play auto- matically . # When playing compressed audio, per forming track search or fast for ward/reverse during TRK (track repeat) changes the repeat play range to folder repeat. # When FLD (folder repeat) is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . Playing tracks in random order Random play plays tracks in a random order within the selected repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 24. 1 Press FUNCTION to select RANDOM. 2 Press a to turn random play on. T racks will play in a random order . # T o turn random play off , press b. Scanning folders and tracks Scan play searches the song within the se- lected repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 24. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCAN. 2 Press a to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. Operating this unit En 39 Section 03 Operating this unit
3 When you find the desired track (or folder) press b to turn scan play off. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing FUNCTION . # After scanning of a disc (folder) is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing disc playback 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current track pauses. # T o turn pause off , press b. Selecting tracks fr om the list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. For CD TEXT discs ! Y ou can also display the track name list by clicking the joystick. T racks can also be se- lected by using the joystick. Refer to Select- ing tracks fr om the track title list on page 38. 1 P ress FUNCTION to select the track title list. P ress FUNCTION until the track title list ap- pears in the display . 2 P ress a or b to scroll through the list of track titles. 3 P ress d to select the desired track title. When you select a track, the selection will begin to play. 4 P ress DISPLA Y to return to the ordinar y dis- play . For WMA/MP3/AAC discs ! Y ou can also display the list of files (or folders) by clicking the joystick. File can also be selected by using the joystick. Refer to Selecting tracks from the file name list on page 38. 1 P ress FUNCTION to select a file name list. P ress FUNCTION until the names of files or folders appears in the display . 2 P ress a or b to scroll through the list of file names (or folder names). 3 P ress d to select the desired file name (or folder name). When you select a file, the selection will begin to play . When you select a folder , a list of files (or folders) in the selected folder appears in the display . ! T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), press c. 4 P ress DISPLA Y to return to the ordinar y dis- play . Searching every 10 tracks in the current disc or folder Y ou can switch the search method between fast forward/reverse and searching ever y 10 tracks. Selecting ROUGH enables you to search ever y 10 tracks. 1 Press FUNCTION to select SCH. 2 Press d to select ROUGH. ! FF/REV â F ast for ward and reverse ! ROUGH â Searching every 10 tracks # T o select FF/REV , press c. 3 Press BAND to return to the playback display . 4 Press and hold c or d to search every 10 tracks on a disc (folder). # If the rest of track number is less than 10, press and hold c or d recalls the first (last) one. Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function let you adjust the sound quality of disc. Operating this unit En 40 Section 03
1 Press FUNCTION to select COMP. 2 Press a or b to select your favorite set- ting. COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î î 1 Disc icon When playing a disc containing various data format, MIXED appear on it. 2 Media indicator 3 F older number indicator 4 T rack (file) number indicator 5 Play time indicator 6 Repeat indicator 7 Random indicator 8 Scan indicator 9 Title display Shows the text information of currently play- ing disc. â For CD TEXT discs D.TITLE (disc title), D.ARTIST (disc artist name), T .TITLE (track title), T .ARTIST (track artist name) â For WMA/MP3/AAC discs ALBUM (album title), TRACK (track title), FOLDER (folder name), FILE (file name), ARTIST (artist name) % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂTitle display # P ressing DISPLA Y button on the Title display switches text information on the head unit. In this case, text information on the Title display remains unchanged. # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Operating this unit En 41 Section 03 Operating this unit
Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments î î î î î î î 1 Audio display Shows the audio adjustment status. 2 BASS indicator Shows when the bass boost is in effect. 3 LOUD indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. 4 SW indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the audio func- tion names. P ress AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following audio functions: FADER (balance adjustment) âÂÂPWRFL (gra- phic equalizer adjustment) â 50HZ 0 (7-band graphic equalizer adjustment) â LOUD (loud- ness) â SUB.W (subwoofer on/off setting) â 80HZ 0 (subwoofer setting) â BASS (bass boost) â HPF (high pass filter) â SLA (source level adjustment) # Y ou can also use A.MENU button on the re- mote control to select an audio menu. # When the rear output setting is R-SP S/W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 53. # Y ou can select the 80HZ 0 only when subwoo- fer output is turned on in SUB.W . # When selecting the FM as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . # If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FADER. # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speak- er balance. FADER F15 to FADER R15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FADER 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. BAL L15 to BAL R15 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL (PWRFL) P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal Operating this unit En 42 Section 03
Display Equalizer curve CUSTOM 1 Custom 1 CUSTOM 2 Custom 2 EQ FLA T Flat SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Super bass ! CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves that you create. Adjust- ments can be made with a 7-band graphic equalizer . ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL (PWRFL) âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL â CUSTOM 1 âÂÂCUSTOM 2 âÂÂEQ FLA T â SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Adjusting equalizer curves The factor y supplied equalizer cur ves, with the exception of EQ FLA T , can be adjusted to a fine degree (nuance control). 1 Press AUDIO to select PWRFL. PWRFL appears in the display . If the equalizer cur ve has been previously se- lected, the cur ve of that previously selected will be displayed instead of PWRFL. 2 Press c or d to select an equalizer curve. 3 Press a or b to adjust the equalizer curve. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the equalizer curve respectively . 6 to âÂÂ4 (or âÂÂ6 ) is displayed as the equalizer cur ve is increased or decreased. # The actual range of the adjustments are differ- ent depending on which equalizer cur ve is se- lected. # The equalizer cur ve with all frequencies set to 0 cannot be adjusted. Adjusting 7-band graphic equalizer Fo r CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the level of each band. ! A separate CUSTOM 1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. If you make adjust- ments when a cur ve other than CUSTOM 2 is selected, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memorized in CUSTOM 1. ! A CUSTOM 2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. If you make adjust- ments when the CUSTOM 2 cur ve is selected, the CUSTOM 2 cur ve will be up- dated. 1 Recall the equalizer curve you want to adjust. See Recalling equalizer cur ves on the previous page. 2 Press AUDIO to select 7-band graphic equalizer adjustment. F requency and the level (e.g., 50HZ 0) appears in the display . 3 Press c or d to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ125Hz âÂÂ315Hz âÂÂ800Hz âÂÂ2kHz â 5kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 4 Press a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the level of the equalization band. Operating this unit En 43 Section 03 Operating this unit
6 to âÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. 5 Press BAND to cancel the 7-band gra- phic equalizer adjustment. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press AUDIO to select LOUD. 2 Press a to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD MID ) appears in the display. # T o turn loudness off , press b. 3 Press c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) â HIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . 1 Press AUDIO to select SUB.W. # Y ou can also select the subwoofer setting menu by pressing SW on the unit. 2 Press a to turn subwoofer output on. SUB.W NOR appears in the display. Subwoo - fer output is now on. # If the subwoofer output phase has been set to the reverse, SUB.W REV will be displayed. # T o turn subwoofer output off , press b. 3 Press c or d to select the phase of sub- woofer output. P ress c to select reverse phase and REV ap- pears in the display. P ress d to select normal phase and NOR appears in the display . Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can ad- just the cut- off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 Press SW to select 80HZ 0. # Y ou can also select the subwoofer setting menu by pressing AUDIO on the unit. # When the subwoofer output is on, you can se- lect 80HZ 0 (subwoofer setting). 2 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency . 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo - fer . 3 Press a or b to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . 6 to âÂÂ24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Boosting the bass Bass boost function boosts the bass level of sound lower than 100 Hz. The more the bass level is increased, the more the bass sound is emphasized and the entire sound becomes power ful. When using this function with the subwoofer , the sound under the cut- off fre- quency is booste d. 1 Press AUDIO to select BASS. # Y ou can also select the bass boost setting by pressing and holding SW. 2 Press a or b to select a desired level. 0 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Operating this unit En 44 Section 03
Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. 1 Press AUDIO to select HPF. 2 Press a to turn high pass filter on. HPF 80HZ appears in the display . High pass filter is now on. # If the high pass filter has been previously ad- justed, the frequency of that previously selected will be displayed instead of HPF 80HZ. # T o turn high pass filter off , press b. 3 Press c or d to select cut-off frequency . 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. SLA 4 to SLA âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The MW/L W volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Operating this unit En 45 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. This menu can be operated only by using the re- mote control. ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVD mode. î 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 Press g. 2 Press MENU when the disc is stopped. The DVD setup menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to dis- play the DVD setup function names. Move the joystick up or down to switch the fol- lowing DVD setup functions: S.TTL LANG (subtitle language settings) â AUDIO LANG (audio language settings) â MENU LANG (menu language settings) â ASSIST (assist subtitle) âÂÂANGLE (angle icon) â TV ASPECT (TV aspect)â P ARENT AL (paren- tal lock) â DIVX VOD (DivX VOD) â DIVX S.TTL (DivX subtitle) â DIGI OUT (digital output setting) Note If you press MENU during display of a DVD setup menu, the DVD setup menu is canceled and the unit returns to the previous display . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select S.TTL LANG. 2 Click the joystick. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired language. 4 Click the joystick. A subtitle language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language dur- ing playback with SUBTITLE . (Refer to Chan- ging the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) on page 22.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE to switch the subti- tle language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 90, use the number but- tons to input the four digit code of the desired language, and then move the joystick right. Note P ressing CLEAR cancels the input numbers. Operating this unit En 46 Section 03
Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select AUDIO LANG. 2 Click the joystick. An audio language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired audio language. 4 Click the joystick. The audio language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language dur- ing playback with AUDIO . (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 21.) ! Even if you use AUDIO to switch the audio language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select MENU LANG. 2 Click the joystick. A menu language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired menu language. 4 Click the joystick. The menu language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ASSIST. 2 Click the joystick. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select on or off. Each time you move the joystick lef t or right the selected setting switches on or off . 4 Click the joystick. The assist subtitle is set on or off . Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . Operating this unit En 47 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting the angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ANGLE. 2 Click the joystick. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select on or off. Each time you move the joystick lef t or right the selected setting switches on or off . 4 Click the joystick. Angle icon display is set on or off . Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to -height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display you use. ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select TV ASPECT. 2 Click the joystick. TV aspect menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired TV aspect. ! 16:9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen 4 Click the joystick. The selected TV aspect is set. Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P ANSCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 7.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc âÂÂs instruc- tions. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! T o per form this function, set the remote control to DVD mode. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parantal lock. ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL. Operating this unit En 48 Section 03
2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input a four digit code number . 4 Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor to the previous or next position. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by moving the joystick right after entering the four digit code number . The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 6 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. ! LEVEL 8 â Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 to LEVEL 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible 7 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Notes ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL. 2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input the re- gistered code number . 4 Move the joystick left or right to move the cursor to the previous or next position. 5 Move the cursor to the last position by moving the joystick right after entering the four digit code number . This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. Press CLEAR and input the correct code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 6 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. 7 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on this page, and press CLEAR 10 times. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Operating this unit En 49 Section 03 Operating this unit
Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX VOD registra- tion code, which you submit to your provider . 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DIVX VOD. 2 Click the joystick. Y our 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider . Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . Setting the DivX subtitle file Y ou can select whether to display DivX exter- nal subtitles or not. ! DivX subtitles will be displayed even when this setting is on if no DivX external subtitle files exist. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DIVX S.TTL. 2 Click the joystick. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select on or off. ! ON â Display the DivX external subtitles ! OFF â Display the DivX subtitles 4 Click the joystick. DivX subtitle is set on or off . Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more then 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be displayed. Setting for digital output Audio which is outputted from digital output of this unit can be selected. Normally , set to STREAM . If this unit âÂÂs digital output is not used, there is no need to change settings. ! Selecting LPCM enables you to switch the output channel if playing the following type of discs. (Refer to Selecting audio output on page 24.) â Dual mono mode DVD video discs â Bilingual DVD - VR discs 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DIGI OUT. 2 Click the joystick. The digital output setting is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired digital output setting. ! STREAM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is output as it is (initial setting) ! LPCM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is con- verted to and output as a linear PCM signal 4 Click the joystick. The selected digital output setting is determined. Operating this unit En 50 Section 03
Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until function name appears in the display . 3 Press FUNCTION to select one of the in- itial settings. P ress FUNCTION to select one of the initial settings. CLOCK AJST (clock) âÂÂOFFCLK (off clock) â FM STP (FM tuning step) âÂÂAUTOPI (auto PI seek) â W ARN (warning tone) âÂÂAUX1 (auxili- ar y input1) â AUX2 (auxiliar y input2) â V .IN (AV input setting) â CAMRA (rear view camera setting) â R-SP (rear output and subwoofer controller) â E-SCRL (ever scroll) â TV (TV sig- nal setting) â D.A TT (digital attenuation) â A.RESET (audio reset) # T o cancel initial settings, press BAND . # Y ou can also cancel initial settings by holding down FUNCTION until the unit turns off . # When you select CAMRA in V .IN , you can se- lect CAMRA . # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate D.A TT and A.RESET instead of R-SP . Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press FUNCTION to select CLOCK AJST. 2 Press c or d to select the segment you wish to set. Hour âÂÂMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. 3 Press a or b to set the clock. P ressing a will increase the value of the se- lected segment. Pressing b will decrease the value of the selected segment. T urning the off clock display on or off If the off clock display is turned on, when the sources are off , the clock appears on the dis- play . 1 Press FUNCTION to select OFFCLK. 2 Press a or b to turn OFFCLK on or off. Setting the FM tuning step Normally the FM tuning step employed by seek tuning is 50 kHz. When AF or T A is on, the tuning step automatically changes to 100 kHz. It may be preferable to set the tuning step to 50 kHz when AF is on. 1 Press FUNCTION to select FM STP. 2 Press c or d to select the FM tuning step. P ressing c or d will switch the FM tuning step between 50 kHz and 100 kHz while AF or T A is on. The selected FM tuning step will ap- pear in the display. Note The tuning step remains at 50 kHz during manual tuning. Operating this unit En 51 Section 03 Operating this unit
Switching Auto PI Seek The unit can automatically search for a differ- ent station with the sam e programming, even during preset recall. 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUTOPI. 2 Press a or b to turn AUTOPI on or off. Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turni ng off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press FUNCTION to select WARN. 2 Press a or b to turn W ARN on or off. Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y equipments connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. About connecting or using auxiliar y equipments, refer to Using the AUX sour ce on page 55. Switching the auxiliary 1 setting 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX1. 2 Press c or d to select desired setting. ! VIDEO â an iP od with video capabilities connected with 4-pole mini plug cable (e.g., CD- V150M) ! AUDIO â auxiliar y equipment connected with stereo mini plug cable ! OFF â No auxiliar y equipment is connected Switching the auxiliary 2 setting 1 Press FUNCTION to select AUX2. 2 Press a or b to turn AUX2 on or off. Setting the A V input Y ou can connect AV components to the AV input with an RCA cable. Switch the AV input setting according to the connected AV component. F or more details, refer to the installation man- ual. ! Select TV to watch video of a TV tuner as TELEVISION source. ! Select DVD to watch video of a connected DVD player as S-DVD source. ! Select EXT .V to watch video of a connected video unit as EXT source. ! Select AUX to watch video of an auxiliar y equipment as AUX2 source. ! Select CAMRA to watch a rear view cam- era video while you are backing your vehi- cle. 1 Press FUNCTION to select V .IN. 2 Press c or d to select your desired set- ting. ! OFF â No video component connected ! TV â TV tuner ! EXT .V â External video unit (such as P ioneer products available in the future) ! DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! AUX â Auxiliar y equipment ! CAMRA â Rear view camera # T o watch video of AUX source, set auxiliar y 2 setting on. For details, refer to Switching the aux- iliar y setting on this page. # If AV system display (e.g., AVX-7600) is com- bined with this unit, connect the rear view cam- era to the AV system display . For details concerning connection methods, refer to AV sys- tem display âÂÂs instruction manual. Also, V .IN set- ting of this unit need not be CAMRA. Operating this unit En 52 Section 03
Setting for r ear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. Y ou can install a rear view camera onto the AV input and display a rear view camera video. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) posi- tion, the video automatically switches to a rear view camera video. (F or more details, consult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shif t in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! When you select CAMRA in V .IN , you can select CAMRA . 1 Press FUNCTION to select CAMRA. 2 Press c or d to select an appropriate setting. ! BA T â When the polarity of the connected lead is positive while the gear shif t is in RE- VERSE (R) position ! GND â When the polarity of the connected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( R-SP FULL ) or subwoofer ( R-SP S/W) connection. If you switch the rear output setting to R-SP S/W, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer with- out using an auxiliar y amp. 1 Press FUNCTION to select R-SP. 2 Press a or b to switch the rear output setting. P ressing a or b will switch between R-SP FULL (full-range speaker) and R-SP S/W (subwoofer) and that status will be displayed. # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select R-SP FULL. # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer R-SP S/W. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the subwoofer output on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 44). ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in the audio menu return to the factor y set- tings. ! Both rear speaker leads outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Switching the Ever Scroll When Ever Scroll is set to ON, recorded text in- formation scrolls continuously in the display . Set to OFF if you prefer the information to scroll just once. 1 Press FUNCTION to select E-SCRL. 2 Press a or b to turn E-SCRL on or off. Setting the TV signal When this unit is connected to a TV tuner , you need to adjust the TV signal suitable to your countr y TV signal setting. Operating this unit En 53 Section 03 Operating this unit
1 Press FUNCTION to select TV. 2 Press c or d to select an appropriate TV signal. PA L â SECAM Note About your countr y TV signal, consult with your nearest P ioneer dealer . Correcting distorted sound Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW . Normally, leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. 1 Press FUNCTION to select D.A TT. 2 Press c or d to select LOW or HIGH. Resetting the audio functions Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P6600) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can reset audio functions other than the following settings. ! V olume setting (refer to Adjusting the vo- lume on page 15) ! Listening position setting (refer to Using the position selector on page 70) ! F ader/balance setting (refer to Using bal- ance adjustment on page 69) ! SLA (source level adjustment) setting (refer to Adjusting sour ce levels on page 72) ! Dynamic range control (refer to Using the dynamic range control on page 71) ! Direct control setting (refer to Using the di- rect contr ol on page 72) ! Down-mix setting (refer to Using the down- mix function on page 71) 1 Press FUNCTION to select A.RESET. 2 Press a to display RESETOK?. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 3 Press d to display REALL Y?. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 4 Press a to reset audio functions. COMPLETE appears in the display. Operating this unit En 54 Section 03
Other Functions Setting the level indicator Level indicators can be changed. Style of the level indicator differs depending on the source. % Press EQ and hold to select the level in- dicator . P ress EQ and hold repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: iPod P rogress bar âÂÂoff âÂÂLevel indicator 1 âÂÂLevel in- dicator 2 âÂÂEntertainment Sources other than iPod Level indicator 1 âÂÂLevel indicator 2 âÂÂEnter- tainment âÂÂoff Notes ! When selecting iP od as a source, the progress bar is displayed as a default setting. When sources other than iP od is selected, the level indicator is displayed as a default setting. ! When the source is changed from iP od, the â progress bar â will be changed to the â level in- dicator 1 âÂÂ. And then, if the source is changed to iP od again, the progress bar is displayed. However , if the level indicator has been chan- ged, the selected level indicator will be dis- played even if the source is changed to iP od again. ! When Entertainment, Level indicator 1 or Level indicator 2 is selected on the iP od source, the selected level indicator will be dis- played even if the source is changed. ! When the optical inputs 1 and 2 on DEQ- P6600 are occupied and AUX is connected to this unit, the level indicators may be incor- rectly displayed. Using the AUX source This unit can control an auxiliar y equipment such as VCR or portable device (sold sepa- rately). When connected, auxiliar y equipment is automatically recognized as AUX source and assigned to AUX. About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y equipments to this unit. Mini pin plug cable ( AUX1) When connecting auxiliar y equipment using a mini plug cable iP od and portable audio/video player can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iP od with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od. ! It is possible to connect a portable audio/ video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) to RCA cable, which is sold sepa- rately . However , depending on the cable, re- verse connection between Red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is re- quired. Other wise, audio and video may not be correctly reproduced. % Insert the mini plug into the micro- phone/auxiliary input jack on this unit. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector ( AUX2) When connecting auxiliar y equipment using an IP -BUS-RCA Inter connector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separetely) to connect this unit to auxiliary equipment featuring RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliar y equipment has RCA outputs. Operating this unit En 55 Section 03 Operating this unit
Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX (AUX1 or AUX2) as the source. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 52. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for each AUX1 or AUX2 source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . 2 Enter a title in the same way as the built-in DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to En- tering disc titles on page 37. Switching between digital and analog When this unit is connected to the DEQ- P6600, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or digital. 1 Press SOURCE to select AUX2 as the source. P ress SOURCE until AUX2 appears in the dis- play . # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX2 cannot be selected. For more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 52. 2 Press BAND to switch the modes. P ress BAND repeatedly to switch between the following modes: ANALOG (analog) â DIGIT AL (digital) Note When this unit is connected to the DEQ-P6600, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or di- gital. However , when you use AUX2 as the source, make sure the AUX mode is set to analog. AUX digital should not be used with this unit. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using BOOKMARK. % Press BOOKMARK to tur n pause on when selecting the following sources: ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! IPOD â iP od ! USB â USB portable audio player/USB memor y ! MUL TI CD â Multi-CD player # T o turn pause off , press BOOKMARK again. % Press BOOKMARK and hold to turn BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress BOOKMARK and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOKMARK again. % Press BOOKMARK and hold to turn BSSM on when selecting TELEVISION as the source. P ress BOOKMARK and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOKMARK again. Sound muting Sound from this unit is muted automaticall y in the following cases: ! When a call is made or received using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. ! When the voice guidance is output from a P ioneer navigation unit connected to this unit. The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume con- trol, are possible. Operation returns to normal when the phone connection or the voice gui- dance is ended. Operating this unit En 56 Section 03
Playing songs on iPod Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control an inter face adapter for iP od, which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the operation manual of the inter face adapter for iP od. This section provides information on iP od operations with this unit which differs from that described in the operation manual. ! iP od is a trademark of Apple Computer , Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun- tries. î î 1 Song number indicator 2 Play time indicator 1 Press SOURCE to select the iPod. P ress SOURCE until you see IPOD displayed. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 3 T o skip back or forward to another song, press c or d. Browsing for a song When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. The operation of this unit to control an iP od is designed to be as close to the operation of the iP od as possible for easy operation and song search. ! If playlist has been selected, first, this unit shows playlist of your iP od âÂÂs name. This playlist plays all songs in your iP od. ! If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compa tible with this unit, those charac- ters will not be displayed. ! If all characters recorded on the iP od are not compa tible with this unit, NO INFO will be displayed. ! Y ou can also per form the following opera- tions by using the joystick. 1 Press a or b repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: PLA YLISTS (playlists) âÂÂARTISTS (artists) â ALBUMS (albums) âÂÂSONGS (songs) â GENRES (genres) # Y ou can also switch to the browsing display by clicking the joystick. 2 Press d to determine the category . List from the selected categor y is displayed. 3 Press a or b to select a song list, album list, artist list or genre list from among the lists. P ress a or b repeatedly to switch the lists. 4 Press d to determine the list. Lists from the selected list are displayed. 5 Repeat step 3 and 4 to find a song you want to listen to. # Y ou can start playback throughout the se- lected list by pressing and holding d. # T o return to the previous list, press c. # F unctions are the same as a/ b/ c/ d buttons. # T o go to the top menu of the list search, press and hold c. # P ress BAND to return to the normal display . A vailable accessori es En 57 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Displaying text information on iPod % Press DISPLA Y to select the desired text information. Song number â SONG TITLE (song title) â ART NAME (artist name) âÂÂALB TITLE (album title) # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. # If all characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, NO INFO will be dis- played. # If specific information has not been recorded on the iP od, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO NAME ). Notes ! Y ou can scroll to the left the text information by pressing and holding DISPLA Y . ! When Ever Scroll is set to ON at the initial set- ting, text information scrolls continuously in the display . Refer to Switching the Ever Scroll on page 53. Introduction of advanced operations î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RDM indicator Shows when random play is selected to SHFL SONG or SHFL ALBUM . 3 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to ONE . % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂSHFL (random play) â P AUSE (pause) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two repeat play ranges: ONE (repeat one song) and ALL (repeat all songs in the list). ! While REPEA T is set to ONE , you cannot se- lect the other songs. 1 Press FUNCTION to select REPEA T. 2 Press c or d to select the repeat range. ! ONE â Repeat just the current song ! ALL â Repeat all songs in the selected list Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: SHFL SONG (play back songs in a random order) and SHFL ALBUM (play back albums in a random order). 1 Press FUNCTION to select SHFL. 2 Press c or d repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: ! SHFL SONG â Play back songs in a random order within the selected list ! SHFL ALBUM â Select an album randomly , and then play back all the songs in it in order ! SHFL OFF â Cancel the random play A vailable accessori es En 58 Section 04
Pausing a song 1 Press FUNCTION to select P AUSE. 2 Press a to turn pause on. Playback of the current song pauses. # T o turn pause off , press b. Switching the information and title display When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the following information will ap- pear on it. î î î î î î 1 Source icon 2 Song number indicator 3 Play time indicator 4 Title display SONG (song title), ARTIST (artist name), ALBUM (album title) % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display âÂÂTitle display # P ressing DISPLA Y button on the Title display switches text information on the head unit. In this case, text information on the Title display remains unchanged. # T ext information on the Title display does not scroll. Playing songs on USB portable audio player/USB memory Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a USB adapter (e.g., CD -UB100), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on USB portable audio player/USB memor y operations with this unit which differs from that described in the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Optimum per formance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y . î î î î 1 F older number indicator 2 T rack number indicator 3 Play time indicator 4 MP3/WMA/AAC indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select USB. 2 Press a or b to select a folder . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 4 T o skip back or forward to another compressed audio file, press c or d. A vailable accessori es En 59 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Displaying text information of an audio file The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Displaying text information on disc on page 37. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Selecting files from the file name list When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Selecting tracks fro m the file name list on page 38. Introduction of advanced operations F or details concerning operation, refer to the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on USB portable audio player/USB memor y operations with this unit which differs from that described in the USB adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! Optimum per formance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y . î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RDM indicator Shows when random play is on. 3 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or FLD . % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â P AUSE (pause) â item list # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM, SCAN , P AUSE and item list operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 24. But the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the USB portable audio player/USB memor y are as below: ! TRK â Repeat just the current file ! FLD â Repeat the current folder ! ALL â Repeat all files RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 39. SCAN Refer to Scanning folders and tracks on page 39. P AUSE Refer to Pausing disc playback on page 40. item list Refer to For WMA/MP3/AAC discs in the Selecting tracks from the list on page 40. Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to ALL . A vailable accessori es En 60 Section 04
! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK , the repeat play range changes to FLD. ! When FLD is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! After file or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the files will begin again. Switching the information and title display The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to F or WMA/MP3/AAC discs in the Switch- ing the information and title display on page 41. Multi-CD Player Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a multi- CD player , which is sold separately . ! Only those functions described in this man- ual ar e supported by 50-disc multi-CD players. ! This unit is not designed to operate disc title list functions with a 50-disc multi-CD player . About the disc title list functions, please refer to Selecting discs from the disc title list on page 65. î î î 1 Disc number indicator 2 T rack number indicator 3 Play time indicator 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-CD player . 2 Press a or b to select a disc you want to listen to. # Y ou can also select a disc by using 1 to 6 but- tons. ! F or discs 1 to 6, press the corresponding button number . ! F or discs 7 to 12, press and hold the corre- sponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the dis- play . 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold c or d. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, press c or d. A vailable accessori es En 61 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- parator y operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR02-XX is displayed, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. Selecting a track directly The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to Se- lecting a track directly on page 36. Introduction of advanced operations Y ou can use COMP (compression and DBE) only with a multi-CD player that supports them. î î î î î 1 F unction display Shows the function status. 2 RDM indicator Shows when random play is on. 3 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to TRK or DSC . Function mode 1 % Press FUNCTION repeatedly to switch between the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂTITLE LIST (disc title list) â RANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â ITS (ITS play) â P AUSE (pause) â COMP (compression and DBE) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. # If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Function mode 2 % Press FUNCTION and hold repeatedly to switch between the following functions: TITLE IN (disc title input) âÂÂITS (ITS program- ming) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM, SCAN , P AUSE , COMP and TITLE IN operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 24. But the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the multi- CD player are as below: ! MCD â Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRK â Repeat just the current track ! DSC â Repeat the current disc TITLE LIST Refer to Selecting discs from the disc title list on page 65. RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 39. SCAN Refer to Scanning folders and tracks on page 39. ITS Refer to Using ITS playlists on the next page. P AUSE Refer to Pausing disc playback on page 40. A vailable accessori es En 62 Section 04
Function name Operation COMP Refer to Using compression on page 40. Multi-CD player has DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) function instead of BMX. The settings can be switched as below : COMP OFF âÂÂCOMP 1 âÂÂCOMP 2 â COMP OFFâ DBE 1â DBE 2 TITLE IN Refer to Entering disc titles on page 37. ITS Refer to Using ITS playlists on this page. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MCD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK , the repeat play range changes to DSC. ! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player , you cannot switch to TITLE IN . The disc title has already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. Af ter you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs (with the disc titles). (With multi-CD players sold be- fore the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. P ress a or b to select the CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press FUNCTION to select ITS. # If you select ITS (ITS play) in function mode 1, press and hold FUNCTION to enable you to select ITS directly . 3 Select the desired track by pressing c or d . 4 Press a to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play, tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi- CD player will begin to play. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 39. 2 Press FUNCTION to select ITS. 3 Press a to turn ITS play on. ITS ON appears in the display . Playback be- gins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. A vailable accessori es En 63 Section 04 A vailable accessories
# If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then ITS EMPTY is dis- played. # T o turn ITS play off , press b. Erasing a track from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete a track from your ITS playlist if ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. If ITS play is not already on, press FUNCTION . 1 Play the CD with the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist, and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until ITS ap- pears in the display . 3 Select the desired track by pressing c or d . 4 Press b to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, ITS EMPTY is displayed and nor- mal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist Y ou can delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS playlist if ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. P ress a or b to select the CD. 2 Press FUNCTION and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press FUNCTION to select ITS. 3 Press b to erase all tracks on the cur - rently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLEAR is dis- played. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the titles. Then you can easily search for and play a de- sired disc. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 100 CD titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi- CD player . Each title can be up to 10 charac- ters long. F or details concerning operation, refer to En- tering disc titles on page 37. ! Titles remain in memor y , even af ter the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is rein- serted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the text information of any disc that has had a disc title entered. The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Displaying text information on disc on page 37. A vailable accessori es En 64 Section 04
Selecting discs from the disc title list Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles that have been entered into the multi- CD player and select one of them to play back. ! Y ou can also per form the following opera- tions by using the joystick. 1 Press FUNCTION to select TITLE LIST. 2 Press c or d to select a disc from the disc title list. # If no title has been entered for a disc, NO D-TITLE will be displayed. 3 Press a to play your favorite CD title. That selection will begin to play . Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Displaying text information on disc on page 37. TV tuner Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. î î î 1 Band indicator Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to. 2 P reset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 3 Channel indicator Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned. 1 Press SOURCE to select the TV . 2 Press BAND to select a band. P ress BAND until the desired band is dis- played, TV1 or TV2. 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly press c or d . The channels move up or down step by step. 4 T o perform seek tuning, press and hold c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly pressing c or d . # If you press and hold c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the button. A vailable accessori es En 65 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you press any of the preset tuning buttons 1 to 6, you can easily store up to six broadcast stations for later recall with the touch of a but- ton. % When you find a station that you want to store in memory , press one of preset tuning buttons 1 to 6 and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you press the same preset tun- ing button the station is recalled from mem- or y . Notes ! Up to 12 stations, six for each of two TV bands can be stored in memor y . ! Y ou can use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning numbers P .CH01 to P .CH12 . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 Press FUNCTION to select BSSM. 2 Press a to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, press b. # T o return to the channel display , press BAND. Notes ! If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the channel display. ! Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using 1 to 6 . A vailable accessori es En 66 Section 04
Bluetooth adapter Y ou can use this unit to control a Bluetooth adapter , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs manuals. This section provides information on Bluetooth telephone/ audio operations with this unit which differs from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs manual. ! This unit is a head unit group 1 unit. â When a Bluetooth wireless connection of a cellular phone or a Bluetooth audio player is established, BT indicator ap- pears in the display. â When a phone call ends, the system re- turns to the previous source. â When a call comes in during sources other than Bluetooth telephone/audio source and the call is being carried on, you cannot use BAND to switch Blue- tooth telephone and Bluetooth audio. Introduction of DVD operation Y ou can use this unit with a separately sold DVD player or multi-DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player â s or multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player â so r multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. Operation Y ou can use the following function with this unit. (Reference page is in this manual.) ! Using ITS playlist and disc title functions â During CD playback when using this unit with a multi-DVD player , you can use these functions. Operation is same as for multi- CD player . Please refer to multi-CD player section. Also, operation of the following function with this unit differs . (Reference page is in this manual.) ! F unction menu switching (Refer to this page.) Function menu switching % During DVD playback, press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂP AUSE (pause) % During Video CD playback, press FUNCTION to display the funct ion names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂP AUSE (pause) A vailable accessori es En 67 Section 04 A vailable accessories
% During compressed audio playback, press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â P AUSE (pause) % During CD playback, press FUNCTION to display the function names. P ress FUNCTION repeatedly to switch be- tween the following functions: REPEA T (repeat play) âÂÂRANDOM (random play) â SCAN (scan play) â ITS (ITS play) â P AUSE (pause) Note When using this unit with multi-DVD player , you can switch to ITS . Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustments Y ou can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (e.g. DEQ-P6600), which is sold sepa- rately . ! Some functions may differ depending on the multi-channel processor connected to this unit. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer When the separately sold display is connected to this unit When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the setting display will appear on it. In this manual, operations are described with head unit âÂÂs buttons and display . A vailable accessori es En 68 Section 04
Operating the DSP menu î î î 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 Subwoofer indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. % Press AUDIO to display the DSP func- tion names. P ress AUDIO repeatedly to switch between the following DSP functions: FADER (balance adjustment) âÂÂPOSI (position selector) â PLII (Dolby Pro Logic II) â music mode adjust â sound field control â Lo/Ro (down mix) â DRC (dynamic range control) â DIRECT (direct) âÂÂSLA (source level adjust- ment) # Y ou can also use A.MENU button on the re- mote control to select an audio menu. # When the rear output setting is R-SP S/W , you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 53. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , you cannot use audio functions. Also, equalizer cur ve setting, POSI , AT E Q and T A AUTO T A will be cancelled. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , audio is outputted from front speakers only . # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you cannot switch to PLII . # All audio functions are locked out when the di- rect control is on except VOLUME and PLII . # When you select MUSIC in the PLII , you can select adjusting music mode. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DRC . # When selecting the FM as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide you an ideal listening envir- onment in all occupied seats. 1 Press AUDIO to select FADER. # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press a or b to adjust front/rear speak- er balance. Each press of a or b moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FADER F25 to FADER R25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FADER 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press c or d to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press c or d, BAL 0 is displayed. Each press of c or d moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL L25 to BAL R25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. A vailable accessori es En 69 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 Press AUDIO to select POSI. 2 Press c/ d/ a/ b to select a listening po- sition. P ress one of these, c/ d/ a/ b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Button Display Position c FRT -L F ront seat left d FRT -R Front seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, press the same button again. Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! If both the center and the rear speakers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 Press AUDIO to select PLII. 2 Press c or d to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF â T urn Dolby Pro Logic II off # Y ou can adjust the music mode only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. Y ou can adjust the music mode only when MUSIC has been selected. When the subwoofer output is on, you can ad- just the cut- off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . ! P anorama ( P ANO ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting â wraparound â effect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSN ) allows you to gra- dually adjust the sound field either towards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER) allows cen- ter-channel sounds to be positioned be- tween the center speaker and the lef t/right speakers. It improves the lef t-center-right stage presentation for both the driver and the front passenger . 1 Press AUDIO to select adjusting music mode. A vailable accessori es En 70 Section 04
2 Press d to select P ANO. P ress a or b to turn P ANO on/off . 3 Press d again to select DIMENSN. Each time you press a or b it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 4 Press d again to select CENTER. Each time you press a or b it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . 3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the lef t/right speakers. Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live per formance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. % Press AUDIO to select the desired SFC mode. P ress c or d repeatedly to switch between the following modes: MUSICAL (musical) âÂÂDRAMA (drama) â ACTION (actio n) âÂÂJAZZ (jazz) âÂÂHALL (hall) â CLUB (club) âÂÂOFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 Press AUDIO to select Lo/Ro. # If the down mix Lt/Rt has been previously se- lected, Lt/Rt will be displayed. 2 Press c or d to switch the down mix settings. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. Using the dyna mic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 1 Press AUDIO to select DRC. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. A vailable accessori es En 71 Section 04 A vailable accessories
2 Press a to turn the dynamic range con- trol on. DRC ON appears in the display . Dynamic range control is now on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , press b. Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME and PLII . 1 Press AUDIO to select DIRECT. 2 Press a to turn the direct control on. DIRCT :ON appears in the display . Direct con- trol is now on. # T o turn direct control off , press b. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 Press AUDIO to select SLA. 3 Press a or b to adjust the source vo- lume. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the source volume. SLA 4 to SLA âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The MW/L W volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . A vailable accessori es En 72 Section 04
Operating the DSP details menu î î î 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 PL II indicator Shows when the Dolby Pro Logic II is turned on. % Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to display the DSP function names. After AT E Q is displayed, press AUDIO repeat- edly , the following DSP functions appear in the display: AT E Q (auto-equalizer on/off) â FRONT (speak- er setting) â HPF (cross- over frequency) â FRT -L (speaker output level) âÂÂTEST TONE (test tone) â TA (time alignment mode) â FL (time alignment adjustment) â PEQ-2 (3-band para- metric equalizer) # Y ou can also use A.MENU button on the re- mote control to select an audio menu. # When you select T A OFF in T A INTIAL , you cannot select FL. # Y ou cannot select AT E Q if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display . # If auto T A and EQ have not been carried out, SET A.EQ is displayed when AT E Q is selected. 2 Press a to turn the auto-equalizer on. A T EQ ON appears in the display . # T o turn auto-equalizer off , press b. Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto -equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . A vailable accessori es En 73 Section 04 A vailable accessories
! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 69.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to EQ FLA T . (Refer to page 79.) â When a subwoofer is connected to this unit, it will be adjusted automatically to both subwoofer output and high pass fil- ter setting for rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. A vailable accessori es En 74 Section 04
3 T urn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. # P ress SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 70. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, FRT -L is selected automatically . 5 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 6 Press and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro- cessor . 8 Press a to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, press any keys. # T o cancel auto T A and EQ part way through, press BAND. 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, COMPLETE is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (R efer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 84.) 11 Press BAND to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. A vailable accessori es En 75 Section 04 A vailable accessories
12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or malfunction. Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LRG (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SML (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SML or OFF. ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. ! Set the front or rear speaker to LRG if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FRONT. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB.W (subwoofer) â PHASE (subwoofer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . 3 Press a or b to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each press of a or b selects the size in the fol- lowing order: SML (small) âÂÂLRG (large) âÂÂOFF (off) # Y ou cannot select OFF , when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF, when SUB.W (sub- woofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REV (reverse phase) or NOR (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoofer setting) has been selected. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Correcting the subwoofer â s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn âÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FRONT. 2 Press c or d to select the subwoofer . Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB.W (subwoofer) â PHASE (subwoofer setting) 3 Press a to turn the subwoofer output on. 4 Press d to select PHASE (subwoofer setting). 5 Press a or b to select the subwoofer output phase. P ress a to select NOR (normal phase). Press b to select REV (reverse phase). A vailable accessori es En 76 Section 04
6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic II turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SML or LRG and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SML or LRG . Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo- fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SML, you can select a fre- quency , under which sounds are reproduced through a LRG speaker or subwoofer . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select HPF. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: F (front speakers) â C (center speaker) âÂÂR (rear speakers) â S (subwoofer) 3 Press a or b to select cross-over fre- quency for the selected speaker . Each press of a or b selects cross-over fre- quencies in the following order: 63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 (Hz) 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SML speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LRG or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listen- ing to an audio output. First, use test tone to adjust the approximate speaker level, and then use this function to adjust finely. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FRT -L. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FRT -L (front speaker lef t) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB.W (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on the previous page.) 3 Press a or b to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . A vailable accessori es En 77 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until FRONT ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select TEST TONE. 2 Press d to start the test tone output. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display . FRT -L (front speaker lef t) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRT -R (front speaker right) â REAR-R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR-L (rear speaker lef t) â SUB.W (subwoofer) # Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 4 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF . (Refer to Setting the speak- er setting on page 76.) 3 Press a or b to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 Press c to stop the test tone output. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at FRT -L . Both provide the same re- sults. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select T A. 2 Press c or d to select the time align- ment. ! T A INTIAL â Initial time alignment (factor y setting) ! T A CUSTOM â Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! T A AUTO T A â Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 73.) ! T A OFF â T urn the time alignment off # If auto T A and EQ have not been carried out, SET A.T A is displayed when T A AUTO T A is se- lected. 3 Press BAND to cancel the time align- ment mode. Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. A vailable accessori es En 78 Section 04
! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in T A CUSTOM . 1 Press AUDIO and hold until FRONT ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select FL. # When you select T A OFF in T A INTIAL , you cannot select FL. # If a position other than FRT -L or FRT -R is se- lected, CHECK POSI is displayed. T o set the posi- tion, refer to Using the position selector on page 70. 2 Press c or d to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of c or d selects the speaker in the following order: FL (front speaker lef t) âÂÂCENT (center speaker) â FR (front speaker right)â RR (rear speaker right) â RL(rear speaker lef t) â S/W(subwoo- fer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 76.) 3 Press a or b to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the distance. 0.0 to 500.0 is displayed as the distance is increased or decreased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL (PWRFL) Powerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal EQ FLA T Flat CUSTOM 1 Custom 1 CUSTOM 2 Custom 2 SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Super bass ! CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL (PWRFL) âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL â EQ FLA T âÂÂCUSTOM 1 âÂÂCUSTOM 2 â SUPER BASS (S-BASS) Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r CUSTOM 1 and CUSTOM 2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a center frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM 1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM 2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. A vailable accessori es En 79 Section 04 A vailable accessories
! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . We recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. 1 Press AUDIO and hold until A T EQ ap- pears in the display , then press AUDIO to select PEQ-2. # Adjusted PEQ-2 settings are memorized in CUSTOM 1 . 2 Press a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of a or b selects the speaker in the following order: FRT (front speakers) âÂÂCENT (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 76.) 3 Press d and then press a or b to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each press of a or b selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) â HI (high) 4 Press d and then press a or b to select the center frequency of selected band. Each press of a or b selects the frequency in the following order: 40 âÂÂ50 âÂÂ63 âÂÂ80 âÂÂ100 âÂÂ125 âÂÂ160 âÂÂ200 â 250 âÂÂ315 âÂÂ400 âÂÂ500 âÂÂ630 âÂÂ800 âÂÂ1k â 1.25k âÂÂ1.6k âÂÂ2k âÂÂ2.5k âÂÂ3.15k âÂÂ4k âÂÂ5k â 6.3k âÂÂ8k âÂÂ10k âÂÂ12.5k (Hz) 5 Press d and then press a or b to adjust the equalizer level. Each press of a or b increases or decreases the equalizer level. 6 to â 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 6 Press d and then press a or b to select the desired Q factor . Each press a or b switches between the fol- lowing Q factor: WID (wide) âÂÂNAR (narrow) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . 7 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. A vailable accessori es En 80 Section 04
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connections are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly . T urn the unit off and then on. Operation with the remote con- trol isn â t possibl e. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 13) Batter y power is low . Load new batter y . (P age 8) Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (P age 86) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly. The unit is perform ing still, slow mo - tion or frame-by-frame playback . There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc â s organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After stopping playback once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly . The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate setting for your display . (P age 48) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Additional Information En 81 Appendix Additional Information
Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 5, P age 93) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 48) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correc t code number . (P age 48) Y ou have forgot ten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P ag e 49) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. Y ou cann ot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in SET -UP MENU . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in SET -UP MENU . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in SET -UP MENU is not recorded on the disc. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in the DVD setup menu. The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in the DVD setup menu. Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in the DVD setup menu is not recorded on the disc. (P age 46) Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cann ot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not pos sible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Additional Information En 82 Appendix
DSP Symptom Cause Action (See) Speakers are not available to be adjusted. Their size settings is at OFF . Make the correct size settings. (P age 76) Time alignme nt is not available. Listening position is not set cor- rectly . Set listening position correctly. (P age 70) Speaker size settings is at OFF . Make the correc t size settings. (P age 76) The subwoofer is not available to switch its phase. The subwoofer is set to OFF . Set the subwoofer to ON. (P age 76) Bass content is not heard. The subwoofer is set to OFF and yet other speakers are set to OFF or SML in size. Make the correct settings. (If no subwoofer is installed, the front or rear speaker needs to be set to LRG.) (P age 76) Ocassionally no sounds are out- put when Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. The center speaker setting is at SML or LRG whereas no center speaker is installed. Change the center speaker size setting to OFF . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only.) (P age 76) Occasionally no sounds are heard over speakers other than the center one. Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. T urn Dolby P ro Logic II off . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby Pro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only .) (P age 70) T urning dynamic range control on has no effects. The currently reproduced sound is not Dolby Digital coded. The feature is only effective on Dolby Digital sounds. (P age 71) No sounds are heard. Optical cables are incorrectly con- nected. Connect the cables correctly. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest P ioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Message Cause Action ERROR02-XX Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. R ERROR The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON-PLA Y This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. HEA T The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 83 Appendix Additional Information
Message Cause Action PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. Error messages on the display Message Cause Action ERROR-02-XX Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Check that the disc is loaded correctly. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION The temperature of this unit is out - side the normal operating range W ait until the unit â s temperature returns to within normal operating limits. DIFFERENT REGION DISC The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play. PROTECTED DISC All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action ERR_MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. ERR_FSP , ERR_FLSP , ERR_FRSP , ERR_CSP , ERR_RSP , ERR_RLSP , ERR_RRSP , ERR_SW The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly . ERR_NOIS The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the microphone correctly . Additional Information En 84 Appendix
Understanding messages Messages T ranslati on CAUTION! SCREEN IMAGE MA Y APPEAR REVERSED Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screen image may appear re- versed. Additional Information En 85 Appendix Additional Information
Handling guideline of discs and player ! Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. ! Use 12-cm or 8-cm disc. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 4. ! Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may da- mage the player . ! Do not touch the recorded sur face of the discs. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir- onments including under direct sunlight. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! Condensation may temporarily impair the player âÂÂs per formance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about one hour . Also, wipe any dump discs with a soft cloth. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. ! Read the precautions with discs before using them. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD -RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD -RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode), be- cause of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs may not be possible be- cause of disc charac teristics, disc format, recorded application, playback environ- ment, storage condi tions and so on. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs ! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode) cannot be played back. ! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been re- corded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back. However , unfinalized disc may not be played back. Unplayable disc should be finalized. In ad- dition, finalized DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) disc cannot be recorded/edited. ! DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) can be played back. However , this unit is not compatible with Layer Jump recording mode. ! F or more information about recording mode, please contact manufacture of DVD recorder or application. Additional Information En 86 Appendix
! The following logo indicates that this unit is compatible with DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the Video Recording format (VR mode). A VCHD recorded discs ! This unit is not compatible with discs re- corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not be ejected. CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/C D -RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD -R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two -sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro - blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. Compressed au dio files on the disc ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player . ! Multi-session playback is possible. ! Compressed audio files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! Only 64 characters from the beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the extension such as .wma or .mp3) or a folder name. ! F older selection sequence or other opera- tion may be altered depending on the en- coding or writing sof tware. ! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording, compressed audio discs will play with a short pause between songs. ! File extensions such as .wma or .mp3 must be used properly . Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 4 5 6 L e v e l 1 L e v e l 2 L e v e l 3 L e v e l 4 ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on one disc. Compressed au dio compa tibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player V er . 7, 7.1, 8, 9 or 10 ! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Loss- less, Voice: No MP3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (em- phasis: 8 kHz to 48 kHz) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority than V ersion 1.x.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iT unes î version 6.0.5 and earlier ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) ! VBR : No ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz ! Apple Lossless: No DivX video files ! Depending on the file information composi- tion such as the number of audio stream, there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs. ! Some special operation may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files. ! DivX files downloaded only from DivX part- ner site are guarantee of proper operation. Unauthorized DivX file may not operate properly . ! DRM rental file cannot be operated until starting playing back. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also, search operation beyond this time limit is prohibited. ! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback is stopped on the way . ! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this unit to DivX VOD provider . About ID code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD re- gistration code on page 50. ! File extensions such as .avi or .divx must be used properly. ! F or more details about DivX, visit the follow- ing site: http://www .divx.com/ DivX compatibility ! Compatible format: DivX video format im- plemented in relation to DivX standards ! DivX Ultra format: No ! DivX files without video data: No ! Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital ! LPCM: No ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Compatible external subtitle file extension: .srt Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, P ushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyar wanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo- Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T on ga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Malte se (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 06 10 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl) , 1612 Additional Information En 90 Appendix
T erms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to -height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com- pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down- load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to -use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band- width output channels from two-channel sources. This new technology enables a dis- crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan- nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. DVD-VR DVD- VR (Video Recording) format enables you to edit directly to the DVD video disc. DVD- VR formats allow you to add new video, change menus, add chapters, split clip, remove video segments and move. Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and sof test sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume le- vels. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD -ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 charac ters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation , which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â sof t- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD -ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Additional Information En 92 Appendix
Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit â s parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit âÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality. WMA WMA is short for Windows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsof t Corporation . WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
Specifications General Po w e r s o u r c e ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ................... N e g a tive type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 1 m m N o s e ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à1 9 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m N o s e ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à1 5 m m We i g h t .......................................... 1 . 4 k g Audio Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Continuous power output . . . 22 W à4 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5% THD, 4 W load, both channels driven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ4 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ2 2 W ÃÂ1 P reout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 2 . 2 V / 1 k W Equalizer (7-Band Graphic Equa lizer): Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/125/315/800/2k/5k/12.5k Hz G a i n ...................................... ñ 1 2 d B Loudness contour: L o w ....................................... 3 . 5 d B (100 Hz), 3 dB (10 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) H i g h ..................................... 1 1 d B (100 Hz), 11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: â 30 dB) HPF : Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 18 dB/oct G a i n ...................................... 6 d B t o â 24 dB Phase .................................. N o r m a l / R everse Bass boost: G a i n ...................................... 1 2 d B t o 0 d B DVD Player System .......................................... D V D v i d e o , D V D -V R, V i d e o CD, CD, WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX system Region number ........................ 2 U s a b l e d i s c s .............................. D V D v i d e o , V i d e o C D , dtsCD, CD, CD-R/RW , DVD- R/RW Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 16/22.05/24/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency response ............... 5 H z t o 4 4 0 0 0 H z ( w i t h DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) S i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o ............... 9 7 d B ( 1 k H z ) ( I E C - A n e t - work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) D y n a m i c ra n g e ......................... 9 5 d B ( 1 k H z ) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz) Output level: V i d e o .................................... 1 . 0 V p - p / 7 5 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo) DivX decoding format ............ H o m e T h e a t e r Ve r. 3 , 4 , 5 . 2 (.avi .divx) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ve r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding format ............ MPEG -4 AAC (iT unes î en- coded only) FM tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) S i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o ............... 7 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t w ork) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 k H z , stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency response ............... 3 0 H z t o 1 5 0 0 0 H z ( ñ 3 d B ) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 k H z ) MW tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 5 3 1 k H z t o 1 6 0 2 k H z ( 9 k H z ) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) S i g n a l - t o - n o i s e r a t i o ............... 6 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t w ork) Additional Information En 94 Appendix
L W tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 1 5 3 k H z t o 2 8 1 k H z Usable sensitivity ..................... 3 0 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B ( I E C - A n e t w o r k ) Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 95 Appendix Additional Information
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-91 20 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkwa y , Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ : å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 : (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å ＠馠港＠æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Corporat ion. Copyright é 2007 by Pioneer Cor poration. All r ights reser ved. Printed in Thailand <CRB2390-A/N> EW <K OKZX> <07B00000>